Sunteți pe pagina 1din 268

Contents

Introduction ................................. 1-1 Keys, Doors and Windows ......... 2-1 Seats and Restraints .................. 3-1 Storage ....................................... 4-1 Instruments and Controls ........... 5-1 Lighting ....................................... 6-1 Climate Controls ......................... 7-1 Driving and Operating ................. 8-1 Vehicle Care ............................... 9-1 Service and Maintenance ......... 10-1 Technical Data .......................... 11-1 Customer Information ............... 12-1 Index ......................................... 13-1

Introduction

1-1

Introduction
Introduction
Introduction .............................. 1-1 Using this Manual ..................... 1-1 Danger, Warnings, and Cautions ................................ 1-1 Symbols ................................... 1-2

Introduction
This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle either because they are op tions that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent to the printing of this owner manual. Please refer to the purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found on your vehicle. Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Danger, Warnings, and Cautions


Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them. Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death. Warning or Caution indicates a haz ard that could result in injury or death.

9 Warning
These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people. Notice This means there is something that could result in property or vehicle damage. This would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty.

Using this Manual


To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found.

1-2

Introduction
$ " I B O # . + 3 j * : } > d M = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Brake System Warning Light Charging System Cruise Control Engine Coolant Temperature Exterior Lamps Fog Lamps Fuel Gauge Fuses Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer LATCH System Child Re straints Malfunction Indicator Lamp Oil Pressure Power Safety Belt Reminders Traction Control Windshield Washer Fluid

A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means Do Not, Do not do this, or Do not let this happen.

Symbols
The vehicle has components and la bels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or infor mation relating to a specific compo nent, control, message, gauge, or in dicator. M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your owner manual for additional instructions or information. * : This symbol is shown when you need to see a service manual for ad ditional instructions or information. Vehicle Symbol Chart Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. For more informa tion on the symbol, refer to the Index. 9 = Airbag Readiness Light # = Air Conditioning ! = Antilock Brake System (ABS)

Keys, Doors and Windows

2-1

Keys, Doors and Windows


Keys and Locks
Keys ......................................... 2-1 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................................. 2-2 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation ................. 2-2 Door Locks ............................... 2-4 Power Door Locks .................... 2-4 Delayed Locking ....................... 2-4 Automatic Door Locks .............. 2-4 Lockout Protection ................... 2-5 Safety Locks ............................. 2-5

Folding Mirrors (C140) ............. 2-9 Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-10 Automatic Dimming Mirror ...... 2-10

Keys and Locks


Keys
9 Warning
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. Children or others could be badly injured or even kil led. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The win dows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror ......... 2-10 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror .................. 2-10

Windows

Windows ................................. 2-11 Power Windows ..................... 2-11 Sun Visors .............................. 2-12 Sunroof ................................... 2-13

Roof

Doors

Liftgate ..................................... 2-6

Vehicle Security

Vehicle Security ....................... 2-7 Anti-Theft Locking System ....... 2-7 Anti-theft Alarm System ........... 2-7 Immobilizer Operation .............. 2-8 Convex Mirrors ......................... 2-9 Power Mirrors ........................... 2-9

Exterior Mirrors

2-2

Keys, Doors and Windows


Press the button on the RKE trans mitter to extend the key. Press the button and the key blade to retract the key. See your dealer if a new key is nee ded. Notice If the keys get locked in the vehicle, it may have to be damaged to get them out. Always carry a spare key. Check the transmitter's battery. See Battery Replacement later in this section. If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see your dealer or a quali fied technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation


The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions will work up to 6 m (20 ft) away from the vehicle. There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the trans mitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System 3 2-2 .

A key that is part of the Remote Key less Entry (RKE) transmitter can be used for the ignition and all locks.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System


Changes or modifications to this sys tem by other than an authorized serv ice facility could void authorization to use this equipment. If there is a decrease in the RKE op erating range: Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle. Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the sig nal.

Keys, Doors and Windows


Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle
To replace the battery:

2-3

c (Lock): Press to lock all doors. The hazard warning lamps will flash once and the anti-theft alarm system will be activated. See Anti-theft Alarm System 3 2-7 . d (Unlock): Press to unlock all doors. The hazard warning lamps will flash twice and the anti-theft alarm system will be deactivated. See Anti-theft Alarm System 3 2-7 .

Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle will work. If a transmit ter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer. When the re placement transmitter is programmed to this vehicle, all remaining transmit ters must also be reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen transmitters will no lon ger work once the new transmitter is programmed.

Battery Replacement 9 Warning


Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in accordance with envi ronmental protection regulations to help protect the environment and your health. Notice When replacing the battery, do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from your body could damage the transmitter.

1. Remove the screw from the back of the transmitter cover and re move the cover. 2. Remove the used battery. Avoid letting other components touch the circuit board. 3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down toward the base. 4. Close the cover of the transmitter unit and put the unit in the cover of the transmitter.

2-4

Keys, Doors and Windows


belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven. Young children who get into un locked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be over come by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Al ways lock the vehicle whenever leaving it. Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop the vehi cle. Locking the doors can help prevent this from happening. To lock or unlock a door, use the key from the outside or the door lock from the inside. Press the right side of the switch to unlock the doors. Remove the ignition key and press the left side of the switch to lock all of the doors.

5. Reassemble the transmitter cover. 6. Check the operation of the trans mitter with the vehicle.

Door Locks
9 Warning
Unlocked doors can be danger ous. Passengers, especially chil dren, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the han dle will not open it. The chance of being thrown out of the vehi cle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked. So, all passengers should wear safety

Delayed Locking
If the vehicle is equipped with the de layed locking feature, a chime will sound to indicate a door or the liftgate is open when you try to lock the doors with the power door lock switch. The doors will not lock, and the theft-de terrent system will not arm until all the doors are closed and five seconds have passed.

Automatic Door Locks


If the vehicle is equipped with the au tomatic door lock feature, the doors automatically lock when the shift lever is moved out of the park position or with vehicle speed. The automatic door lock feature can not be disabled.

Power Door Locks


T : The power door lock switches are located on the front doors.

Keys, Doors and Windows


The doors automatically unlock when the shift lever is moved into P(Park) or the key is removed from the igni tion.

2-5

Safety Locks
The vehicle has rear door safety locks. These prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.

Lockout Protection
If the vehicle is equipped with the lockout protection feature, when the power door lock switch is pressed with the key in the ignition, and any door is open, all the doors lock and the driver door unlocks. When doors are closed with the key in the ignition, the horn will sound as a reminder. If the doors are locked with the Re mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit ter, and the key is in the ignition, a chime sounds and all except the driver door lock. The lockout protection feature can be overridden by holding the power door lock switch for three seconds.

Lock Label shown


The rear door safety locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door. The rear doors must be open to ac cess them. The label showing lock and unlock positions is located near the lock.

To set the locks: 1. Insert the key into the safety lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position. 2. Close the door. To open a rear door when the safety lock is on: 1. Unlock the door using the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the power door lock switch, or the rear door manual lock. 2. Open the door from the outside. To cancel the rear door safety lock: 1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside. 2. Insert the key into the safety lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

2-6

Keys, Doors and Windows


If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate, disable the power liftgate function. For more information about car bon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust 3 8-20. To lock or unlock the liftgate, press the button on the Remote Keyless En try(RKE) transmitter twice or press the power door lock switch. To open the liftgate, press the touch pad on the underside of the liftgate handle and pull up. To close the liftgate, pull down using the handle and close until it latches. Liftgate Operation with Loss of Power

Doors
Liftgate
9 Warning
Exhaust gases can enter the vehi cle if it is driven with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any ob jects that pass through the seal between the body and the trunk/ hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: Close all of the windows. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel. Adjust the Climate Control sys tem to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See Climate Control Systems in the Index.

To open the liftgate if the vehicle's battery is disconnected or the voltage is low, access the release lever. Re move the interior trim cover on the in side of the liftgate. Use a tool to push the lever on the latch until the liftgate releases.

Keys, Doors and Windows

2-7

Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent fea tures; however, they do not make it impossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Locking System


The vehicle may be equipped with a deadbolt locking feature in addition to the standard door locks. Use either the key or the Remote Key less Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock or unlock the doors and operate the deadbolt. Hold the key in the lock position for a few seconds or quickly turn the key twice in the lock cylinder to se cure the doors with the deadbolt. Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter once to lock all the doors. Pressing the button again within three seconds will secure the deadbolt. When the doors are secured with the deadbolt, the manual door lock con trols will not unlock the doors.

Also, if the theft-deterrent system is armed, the doors cannot be unlocked using the power door lock controls. Press the unlock button on the trans mitter once to open the deadbolt and unlock the driver door. Pressing the button again within three seconds will unlock all the doors. Unlocking the driver door from the outside with the key disengages the deadbolt for all doors. However, only the driver door will be unlocked. You must unlock the passenger doors manually or with the power door locks.

The alarm automatically arms after about 30 seconds. The security light, located next to the clock on the instrument panel, will flash slowly. Pressing c a second time will by pass the 30-second delay and imme diately arm the system.

Disarming the System

Anti-theft Alarm System


This vehicle may have an anti-theft alarm system.

To disarm the system: Press d on the RKE transmitter. Unlock the driver door with the key. If the door is not opened or the engine is not started within 30 seconds after disarming the system, all the doors are automatically locked and the sys tem will rearm.

Arming the System

Turning off the System Alarm

To arm the system, close all of the windows and doors and then: Press c on the RKE transmitter. Or, lock the vehicle using the key in the driver door.

If there is an attempt to open the doors, liftgate, or hood without first pressing d on the transmitter or un locking the driver door with the key, the system alarm will be activated. The exterior lamps will flash and the horn will sound for about 30 seconds.

2-8

Keys, Doors and Windows


Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft-de terrent system in the vehicle.

To turn off the system alarm: Press c or d on the RKE trans mitter. Unlock the driver door with the key.

Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle has a passive theft-de terrent system. The system does not have to be man ually armed or disarmed. The vehicle is automatically immobi lized when the key is removed from the ignition. The system is automatically disarmed when the vehicle is started with the correct key. The key uses a trans ponder that matches an immobilizer control unit in the vehicle and auto matically disarms the system. Only the correct key starts the vehicle. The vehicle may not start if the key is dam aged.

The immobilizer light, located in the instrument panel cluster, comes on if there is a problem with arming or dis arming the theft-deterrent system. See Immobilizer Light 3 5-25. When trying to start the vehicle, the immobilizer light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on. If the engine does not start and the immobilizer light stays on, there is a problem with the system. Turn the ignition off and try again. If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key. If the engine still does not start and the light continues to stay on with the other key, the vehicle needs service. If the vehicle does start, the first key may be damaged. See your dealer who can service the theft-deterrent system and have a new key made.

Keys, Doors and Windows

2-9

Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
9 Warning
A convex mirror can make things, like other vehicles, look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before chang ing lanes. Both passenger and driver outside mirrors are convex shaped. A convex mirror's surface is curved so that more can be seen of the road behind the vehicle.

Power Mirrors

The ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. The outside mirrors will work up to 10minutes after the vehicle has been turned off. If a door is opened while the key is in the LOCK position or taken out of the ignition, the mirror will not work.

Folding Mirrors (C140)


Manual
Controls for the outside power mirrors are on the driver side instrument panel. To adjust: 1. Turn the knob to choose the left (L) or right (R) mirror. 2. Adjust each mirror so that the side and the area behind the vehicle can be seen. 3. Return the control to the center position so the mirror cannot be moved. Manually fold the outside mirrors in to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, while sitting in the vehicle, pull the mirrors toward the vehicle. Push out, to return the mirrors to their original position.

2-10
Power

Keys, Doors and Windows Heated Mirrors


For vehicles with outside heated mir rors: = (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the outside rearview mirrors.

Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view of behind your ve hicle. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you. Push the tab at the bottom of the mir ror forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.

Automatic Dimming Mirror


If the vehicle has the automatic dim ming mirror, the driver outside mirror automatically adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by the on and off setting on the inside rearview mirror. See

For vehicles with power folding mir rors, press the folding mirror button to fold the outside mirrors flat against the side of the vehicle. The ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Power to the folding outside mirrors will work up to 10minutes after the vehicle has been turned off. Power to the folding outside mirrors will turn off if a door is opened while the key is in the LOCK position or taken out of the ignition.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror


The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside rearview mirror. Auto matic dimming reduces the glare from the headlamps of the vehicle behind you. The dimming feature and the in dicator light come on each time the vehicle is started.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror 3 2-10 for more information.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a soft towel damp ened with water.

Keys, Doors and Windows

2-11

Windows
9 Warning
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the win dows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics are de signed to improve fuel economy per formance. This may result in a pulsing sound when either rear window is down and the front windows are up. To reduce the sound, open either a front window or the sunroof (if equipped).

Power Windows
9 Warning
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons. Children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power win dows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The win dows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing win dow. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children. When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout but ton to prevent unintentional oper ation of the windows.

2-12

Keys, Doors and Windows


Press the switch down all the way and release it and the window lowers all the way. To stop the window while it is lower ing, press and release the switch. Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the center mount to pivot to the side window, or to extend along the rod, if available.

Window Lockout

The window switches for all doors are located on the driver door. Each door also has a switch. To open or close a window, press or pull up on the switch. The power windows operate when the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/AC CESSORY.

o (Window Lockout): The vehicle has a lockout feature to prevent rear seat passengers from operating the win dows. Press the lockout button, loca ted with the power window switches, to turn the feature on and off.

Sun Visors

Express-Down Window

The driver window switch has an ex press-down feature that lowers the window without holding the switch. Press the switch part way and the window will open a small amount.

Keys, Doors and Windows

2-13

Roof
Sunroof

manually operated. The sun shade cannot be closed with the sunroof open. Slide and hold the switch forward to close the sunroof. The sun shade must be closed manually. B. Vent Open/Close: Press and hold the switch to vent the sunroof. Pull and hold the switch to close it. The sunshade must be manually op erated when the sunroof is in the vent position.

seal and roof sealing area using a clean cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not remove grease from the sun roof.

The sunroof switch is located be tween the sun visors. To operate the sunroof, the ignition must be in ON/RUN, or ACC/ACCES SORY. A. Open/Close: Slide and release the switch rearward to express open the sunroof. Slide the switch forward or rearward to stop move ment. The sunshade opens automati cally with the sunroof or can be

Dirt and debris may collect on the sunroof seal or in the track. This could cause an issue with sunroof opera tion, noise, or plugging the water drainage system. Periodically open the sunroof and remove any obsta cles or loose debris. Wipe the sunroof

2-14

Keys, Doors and Windows

Seats and Restraints

3-1

Seats and Restraints


Head Restraints Front Seats
Head Restraints ....................... 3-2 Active Head Restraints ............. 3-3 Seat Adjustment ....................... 3-3 Power Seat Adjustment ............ 3-4 Lumbar Adjustment .................. 3-5 Reclining Seatbacks ................. 3-5 Heated Front Seats .................. 3-7 Folding Seatback ..................... 3-7 Rear Seats ............................... 3-8

Safety Belt Care ..................... 3-20 Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash .............. 3-20

Airbag System

Rear Seats

Safety Belts

Safety Belts (All except Aus, NZ) ...................................... 3-10 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly (RHD) ................... 3-12 Lap-Shoulder Belt .................. 3-16 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ........................... 3-18 Lap Belt .................................. 3-19 Safety System Check ............. 3-20

Airbag System ........................ 3-21 Where Are the Airbags? ......... 3-22 When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................................ 3-24 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................................ 3-25 How Does an Airbag Restrain? ............................ 3-25 What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? ................... 3-26 Airbag On-Off Switch ............. 3-27 Servicing the AirbagEquipped Vehicle ................ 3-29 Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 3-30 Airbag System Check ............. 3-30 Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash .............. 3-30

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) (All Other Markets) .............................. 3-38 Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash ............. 3-42 Securing Child Restraints (Rear Seat) ......................... 3-42 Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat without Airbag Off Switch) .......................... 3-43 Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat with Airbag Off Switch) ................................ 3-44

Child Restraints

Older Children ........................ 3-31 Infants and Young Children .... 3-33 Child Restraint Systems ......... 3-35 Where to Put the Restraint ..... 3-37

3-2

Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints
Front Seats
The vehicle's front seats have adjust able headrests in the outboard seat ing positions.

9 Warning
With headrests that are not instal led and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the headrests for all occupants are in stalled and adjusted properly.

Adjust the headrest so that the top of the headrest is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the headrest can be ad justed. Pull the headrest up to raise it. Try to move the headrest to make sure that it is locked in place. To lower the headrest, press the but ton, located on the top of the seat back, and push the headrest down. Try to move the headrest after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. On some models, the headrest can be adjusted forward and rearward. To adjust the headrest forward, grasp the headrest at the bottom and pull forward to the desired locked posi tion. To adjust the headrest rearward,

Seats and Restraints


grasp the headrest at the bottom and pull forward fully until the mechanism releases and allows the headrest to return to the full rear position. The front seat outboard headrests are not designed to be removed. To lower the headrest, press the but ton, located on the top of the seat back, and push the headrest down. Try to move the headrest to make sure that it is locked in place. Rear seat headrests are not designed to be removed.

3-3

Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
9 Warning
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could star tle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

Rear Seats

The vehicle's rear seat has adjustable headrests in all three seating posi tions.

Active Head Restraints


The vehicle may have an active head restraint system in the front seating positions. These automatically tilt for ward to reduce the risk of neck injury if the vehicle is hit from behind.

Seat Position

The height of the headrest can be ad justed. Pull the headrest up to raise it. Try to move the headrest to make sure that it is locked in place.

3-4

Seats and Restraints Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a manual seat: 1. Lift the bar under the front of the seat cushion to unlock the seat. 2. Slide the seat to the desired posi tion and release the bar. 3. Try to move the seat back and forth to be sure it is locked in place.

Driver Seat Height Adjuster


Raise or lower the front or rear part of the seat cushion by moving the front or rear of the control up or down.

Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the horizontal control forward or rearward.

If available, move the lever up or down repeatedly to raise or lower the driver seat.

Seats and Restraints Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks


9 Warning
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined like this. The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt cannot do its job ei ther. In a crash, the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause se rious internal injuries. For proper protection when the ve hicle is in motion, have the seat back upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.

3-5

If available, move the lever forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support.

Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving.

Manual Reclining Seatbacks 9 Warning


You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could star tle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

3-6

Seats and Restraints


9 Warning
To recline a manual seatback: 1. Lift the lever. 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, and then release the lever to lock the seatback in place. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. To return the seatback to the upright position: 1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback, and the seatback will return to the upright position. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause in jury to the person sitting there. Al ways push and pull on the seat backs to be sure they are locked.

To adjust a power seatback, if equip ped: Tilt the top of the control rearward to recline. Tilt the top of the control forward to raise.

Seats and Restraints Heated Front Seats


9 Warning
If you cannot feel temperature change or pain to the skin, the seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns, people with such a condition should use care when using the seat heater, especially for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that in sulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, cover, or simi lar item. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat heater may cause a burn or may damage the seat.

3-7

Seven-Passenger Vehicles

Folding Seatback
The front passenger seatback may fold flat.

9 Warning
If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating airbag might force that object to ward a person. This could cause severe injury or even death. Se cure objects away from the area in which an airbag would inflate. For more information, see Vehicle Load Limits 3 8-10 and Where Are the Airbags? 3 3-22 .

On vehicles with heated front seats, the controls are on the center con sole. To operate, the engine must be running. Press L or M to heat the driver or pas senger seat. The indicator light on the button turns on when this feature is on. Press the button again to turn this feature off. The passenger seat may take longer to heat up.

9 Warning
Things you put on this seatback can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. Remove or secure all items before driving.

3-8

Seats and Restraints


To return the seatback to the upright position: 1. Raise the seatback and push it rearward until it re-engages.

To fold the seatback: 1. Lower the head restraint com pletely. 2. Lift the bar under the front of the seat cushion to unlock the seat. Slide the seat as far back as it will go and release the bar. 3. Try to move the seat back and forth to make sure it is locked into place.

Rear Seats
Folding the Seatback To fold a seatback: Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause dam age to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. 1. Unbuckle the rear safety belts and put the front seatback in the up right position. See Reclining Seatbacks 3 3-5

9 Warning
If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause in jury to the person sitting there. Al ways push and pull on the seat backs to be sure they are locked. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked in place. The lever is also used to recline the seatback. See Reclining Seatbacks 3 3-5 .

4. Lift the lever and fold the seatback forward until it disengages. 5. Continue folding the seatback un til it is completely folded.

Seats and Restraints


2. Lift the lever on the top of the seat back and fold the seatback for ward. 3. Repeat Steps1 and 2 for the other seatback, if desired. Raising the Seatback

3-9

9 Warning
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protec tion needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seat back, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted. To return the seatback to the upright position: 1. Lift the seatback up and push it back into place. 2. Push and pull the top of the seat back to be sure it is locked into position. 3. Make sure the safety belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback. 4. Repeat Steps1 and 2 for the other seatback, if necessary. When the seatback is not in use, it should be kept in the upright, locked position.

Reclining the Seatback To recline the seatback: 1. Lift and hold the lever on top of the seatback. 2. Tilt the seatback rearward, and then release the lever. 3. Repeat Steps1 and 2 for the other seatback, if desired.

9 Warning
If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause in jury to the person sitting there. Al ways push and pull on the seat backs to be sure they are locked.

9 Warning
If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause in jury to the person sitting there. Al ways push and pull on the seat backs to be sure they are locked. To return the seatback to the upright position: 1. Lift and hold the lever on top of the seatback. 2. Pull the seatback forward to the upright position, and then release the lever.

3-10

Seats and Restraints

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. 4. Repeat Steps1 and 2 for the other seatback, if necessary.

Safety Belts
Safety Belts (All except Aus, NZ)
This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts properly. It also describes some things not to do with safety belts.

9 Warning
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people rid ing in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in the vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt prop erly. This vehicle has indicators as a re minder to buckle the safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders 3 5-14 for additional information. In most regions, the law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why: You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up, a person would not sur vive. But most crashes are in be tween. In many of them, people who

9 Warning
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn prop erly. In a crash, if you or your pas senger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be seriously in jured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be, if you are buck led up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passen ger(s) are restrained properly too.

Seats and Restraints


buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without safety belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 40years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!

3-11

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes. Put someone on it. The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels. Get it up to speed. Then stop the ve hicle. The rider does not stop.

3-12

Seats and Restraints


Questions and Answers About Safety Belts

or the instrument panel...

? If I am a good driver, and I never

? Will I be trapped in the vehicle after

a crash if I am wearing a safety belt? ! You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are upside down. or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense.

? If my vehicle has airbags, why

should I have to wear safety belts? ! Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occu pants still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions, but es pecially in side and other colli sions.

drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts? ! You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a crash even one that is not your fault you and your passenger(s) can be hurt. Be ing a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your con trol, such as bad drivers. Most accidents occur within 40km of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths oc cur at speeds of less than 65km/h. Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly (RHD)


This section is only for people of adult size. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and chil dren. And there are different rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the vehicle, see Older

Seats and Restraints


Children 3 3-31 or Infants and Young Children 3 3-33. Follow those rules for everyone's protection. It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that unbel ted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.

3-13

? What is wrong with this?

! The shoulder belt is too loose. It


will not give as much protection this way.

9 Warning
You can be seriously hurt if the shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase in jury. The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body.

3-14

Seats and Restraints

? What is wrong with this?

? What is wrong with this?

? What is wrong with this?

! The lap belt is too loose. It will not


9 Warning
You can be seriously hurt if the lap belt is too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.

give nearly as much protection this way.

! The belt is buckled in the wrong


buckle.

! The belt is over an armrest.


9 Warning
You can be seriously injured if the belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armr ests.

9 Warning
You can be seriously injured if the belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle the belt into the buckle nearest you.

Seats and Restraints

3-15

? What is wrong with this?

9 Warning
You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which are not as strong as shoul der bones. You could also se verely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.

? What is wrong with this?

! The shoulder belt is worn under the


arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

! The belt is behind the body.

3-16

Seats and Restraints


9 Warning

? What is wrong with this?

Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt except for the second row center position which may have a lap belt. See Lap Belt 3 3-19 for more information. The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt prop erly. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is ad justable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see Seats in the In dex.

You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body could move too far for ward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. You might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.

! The belt is twisted across the body.


9 Warning
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

Seats and Restraints


2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. If the shoulder portion of a pas senger belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and start again. 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if neces sary. 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster later in this section for instructions on use and important safety infor mation.

3-17

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. It may be necessary to pull the stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position. Slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt is not in use. The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.

3-18

Seats and Restraints


and rear impacts if the threshold con ditions for pretensioner activation are met. Pretensioners are not designed to activate in a minor frontal crash. Pretensioners are designed to acti vate in a moderate to severe rear crash. Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, the pretensioners and probably other new parts for the vehicle's safety belt system will need to be replaced. See Squeeze the release buttons(A) to gether and move the height adjuster up or down to the desired position. After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to move it up or down without squeezing the release but tons to make sure it has locked into position.

Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and outboard front passenger seating positions. Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away from the face and neck, but not falling off of the shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash 3 3-20 .

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy


Safety belts work for everyone, in cluding pregnant women. Like all oc cupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

The vehicle has safety belt preten sioners for the front outboard occu pants. Although the safety belt pre tensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts dur ing a severe frontal crash, and side

Seats and Restraints Lap Belt


This section is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt 3 3-16 . The vehicle may have a second row center seating position with a lap belt. The lap belt has no retractor.

3-19

A pregnant woman should wear a lapshoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them prop erly.

To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt. Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lapshoulder belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary. If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle. To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

3-20

Seats and Restraints


9 Warning
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water. After a minor crash, replacement of safety belts may not be necessary. But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer to have the safety belt assem blies inspected or replaced. New parts and repairs may be neces sary even if the safety belt system was not being used at the time of the crash. Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash, or if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light 3 5-15 .

Safety System Check


Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light, safety belts, buck les, latch plates, retractors, and an chorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See Safety Belt Reminders 3 5-14 for more infor mation. Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Safety Belt Care 3 3-20.

Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash


9 Warning
A crash can damage the safety belt system in the vehicle. A dam aged safety belt system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the safety belt systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any nec essary replacements made as soon as possible.

Safety Belt Care


Keep belts clean and dry.

Seats and Restraints

3-21

Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags: A frontal airbag for the driver. A frontal airbag for the outboard front passenger. The vehicle may have the following airbags: A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver. A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the outboard front passenger. A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly be hind the driver. A roof-rail airbag for the outboard front passenger and the passenger seated directly behind the outboard front passenger. All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the outboard front passenger. With seat-mounted side impact air bags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest to the door. With roof-rail airbags, the word AIR BAG will appear along the trim.

risk of injury from the force of an in flating bag, all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job. Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system:

9 Warning
You can be severely injured or kil led in a crash if you are not wear ing your safety belt, even with air bags. Airbags are designed to work with safety belts, not replace them. Also, airbags are not de signed to inflate in every crash. In some crashes safety belts are the only restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? 3 3-24 . Wearing a safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts. Everyone in the vehicle should wear a safety belt properly, whether or not there is an airbag for that person.

9 Warning
Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating air bag might force that object toward a person. This could cause severe injury or even death. Secure ob jects away from the area in which an airbag would inflate. For more information, see Where Are the Airbags? 3 3-22 and Vehicle Load Limits 3 8-10 . Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Even though today's airbags are also designed to help reduce the

3-22

Seats and Restraints


9 Warning 9 Warning
Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child re straint system can provide. Always secure children properly in the ve hicle. To read how, see Older Children 3 3-31 or Infants and Young Children 3 3-33 . The system checks the airbag electri cal system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical prob lem. See Airbag Readiness Light 3 5-15 for more information.

Because airbags inflate with great force and faster than the blink of an eye, anyone who is up against, or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to any airbag, as you would be if sitting on the edge of the seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear a safety belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side win dows in seating positions with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in the mid dle of the steering wheel.

There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.

Seats and Restraints

3-23

The front passenger frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the pas senger side.

Passenger Side Shown, Driver Side Similar


If the vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and front passenger, they are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door.

Passenger Side Shown, Driver Side Similar


If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, front passenger, and sec ond row outboard passengers, they are in the ceiling above the side win dows.

3-24

Seats and Restraints


9 Warning

If something is between an occu pant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that per son causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation path of a seatmounted side impact airbag. Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie-down through any door or window open ing. If you do, the path of an inflat ing roof-rail airbag will be blocked.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?


Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal crashes to help reduce the po tential for severe injuries mainly to the driver's or outboard front passenger's head and chest. However, they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deploy ment threshold. Deployment thresh olds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It de pends largely on what you hit, the di rection of the impact, and how quickly your vehicle slows down. Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For example: If the vehicle hits a stationary ob ject, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object.

If the vehicle hits an object that de forms, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform. If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the airbags could in flate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall). If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the ob ject. Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design. Frontal airbags are not intended to in flate during vehicle rollovers, rear im pacts, or in many side impacts. Always wear your safety belt, even with frontal airbags. The vehicle may have seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System 3 3-21 . Seat-moun ted side impact and roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to

Seats and Restraints


severe side crashes. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system's designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design. Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near frontal impacts, roll overs, or rear impacts. Roof-rail air bags are not intended to inflate in roll overs or rear impacts. A seat-moun ted side impact airbag and roof-rail airbags are intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck. In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the dam age to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle of the im pact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags, deploy ment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact.

3-25

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?


In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an electrical signal trig gering a release of gas from the infla tor. Gas from the inflator fills the air bag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag module. Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instru ment panel. For vehicles with seatmounted side impact airbags, there are airbag modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceil ing of the vehicle, near the side win dows that have occupant seating po sitions.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?


In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occu pants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate

to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Frontal air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's up per body, stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's upper body. But airbags would not help in many types of collisions, primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? 3 3-24 for more infor mation. Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts.

3-26

Seats and Restraints


9 Warning
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a win dow or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention. The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn on the interior lamps, turn on the haz ard warning flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn off the interior lamps, and turn off the hazard warning flashers by using the controls for those features.

What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates?


After the frontal airbags and seatmounted side impact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see

9 Warning
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may have also dam aged important functions in the ve hicle, such as the fuel system, brake and steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may be concealed damage that could make it difficult to safely operate the vehicle. Use caution if you should attempt to restart the engine after a crash has occurred. In many crashes severe enough to in flate the airbag, windshields are bro ken by vehicle deformation. Addi tional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag. Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be

What Makes an Airbag Inflate? 3 3-25 . The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Air bag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the wind shield or being able to steer the vehi cle, nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

Seats and Restraints


there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which re cords information after a crash. See

3-27

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 3 12-1 and Event Data Recorders 3 12-1 . Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer for service.

Airbag On-Off Switch


If the instrument panel has the switch pictured in the following illustration, the vehicle has an airbag on-off switch that is used to manually turn on or off the front passenger frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags, and the roof-rail airbag for the front passenger and the passenger sitting directly behind the front passenger.

This switch should only be turned to the off position if the person in the front passenger position falls under the conditions specified in this man ual as follows: Infant. An infant (less than 1year old) must ride in the front seat because of any of the following: My vehicle has no rear seat. My vehicle has a rear seat too small

to accommodate a rear-facing infant seat. The infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant's physician, makes it necessary for

the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child's condition. Child age 1 to 12. A child aged 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because of any of the following: My vehicle has no rear seat. Although children aged1to12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible, children aged1to12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle. The child has a medical condition which, according to the child's physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child's condition. Medical Condition. A passenger has a medical condition which, according to his or her physician does both of the following: Causes the passenger airbags to pose a special risk for the passenger.

3-28

Seats and Restraints


above the glove box, in the instrument panel. See Airbag On-Off Light 3 5-15 for additional information. When the airbags are turned off, the passenger airbag off light, in the pas senger airbag status indicator, comes on to let you know the airbags for the front passenger and passenger seated directly behind the front pas senger are off. These airbags remain off until you turn them back on again. The airbag on-off switch is on the in strument panel end cap, on the pas senger side of the vehicle. To turn off the front passenger frontal and seatmounted side impact airbags, and the roof-rail airbag for the front passenger and the passenger sitting directly be hind the front passenger, insert any key or a coin into the switch, push in, and move the switch to the off posi tion. The belt pretensioners and all driver airbag systems will remain ac tive. Vehicles equipped with an airbag onoff switch also have a passenger air bag status indicator. This indicator is

Makes the potential harm from the

passenger airbags in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning off the airbags and allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash.

9 Warning
If the front passenger airbags are turned off for a person who does not fall under the conditions speci fied in this manual, that person will not have the extra protection of the airbags. In a crash, the airbags will not be able to inflate and help pro tect the person sitting there. In ad dition, the roof-rail airbag will not be able to protect the person sit ting directly behind the front pas senger. Do not turn off the airbags unless the person sitting in the front passenger seat falls under the conditions specified in this manual.

Seats and Restraints


9 Warning
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. For example, the front passenger frontal and seat-mounted side impact air bags, and the roof-rail airbag for the front passenger and the pas senger sitting directly behind the front passenger could inflate even though the airbag on-off switch is turned off. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 3 5-15 for more informa tion, including important safety in formation.

3-29

Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle


Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system.

9 Warning
To turn the airbags on again, insert any key or a coin into the switch, push in, and move the switch to the on po sition. The front passenger frontal and seatmounted airbags, and the roof-rail air bag for the front passenger and pas senger sitting directly behind the front passenger are now enabled, and may inflate. When the airbags are turned on, the passenger airbag on light, in the passenger airbag status indicator, comes on to let you know the airbags are on. See Airbag On-Off Light 3 5-15 for more information. For up to 10seconds after the ve hicle is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are prob ably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service pro cedures, and make sure the per son performing work for you is qualified to do so.

3-30

Seats and Restraints

Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

? Because I have a disability, I have


to get my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this will af fect my airbag system? ! If you have questions, see your dealer.

? Is there anything I might add to or

change about the vehicle that could keep the airbags from work ing properly? ! Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle's frame, bumper sys tem, height, front end or side sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from working properly. Changing or moving any parts of the seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, side impact sensors, or airbag wiring can affect the op eration of the airbag system. If you have questions, See your dealer.

The dealer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors, sensing and di agnostic module and airbag wiring.

Notice If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? 3 3-22 . See your dealer for service.

Airbag System Check


The airbag system does not need reg ularly scheduled maintenance or re placement. Make sure the airbag readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light 3 5-15 for more in formation.

Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash


9 Warning
A crash can damage the airbag systems in the vehicle. A damaged airbag system may not work prop erly and may not protect you and your passenger(s) in a crash, re sulting in serious injury or even death. To help make sure the air bag systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.

Seats and Restraints


If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. See your dealer for service. If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on when you are driving, the airbag system may not work properly. Have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 3 5-15 for more information.

3-31

Child Restraints
Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehi cle's safety belts. The manufacturer's instructions that come with the booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the child passes the below fit test:

Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoul der? If yes, continue. If no, then re turn to the booster seat. Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. Can proper safety belt fit be main tained for the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.

3-32

Seats and Restraints


9 Warning
Never do this. Never allow two children to wear the same safety belt. The safety belt cannot properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A safety belt must be used by only one person at a time.

? What is the proper way to wear

safety belts? ! An older child should wear a lapshoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can pro vide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. According to accident statistics, chil dren and infants are safer when prop erly restrained in a child restraint sys tem or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. In a crash, children who are not buck led up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts properly.

9 Warning
Never do this. Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be re strained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoul der belt should go over the shoul der and across the chest.

Seats and Restraints


9 Warning
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave children un attended in a vehicle and never al low children to play with the safety belts. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older chil dren, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection pro vided by appropriate child restraints. Children who are not restrained prop erly can strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

3-33

9 Warning
Never do this. Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not pos sible to hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash at only 40km/ h(25mph), a 5.5kg(12lb) infant will suddenly become a 110kg (240lb) force on a person's arms. An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint.

Infants and Young Children


Everyone in a vehicle needs protec tion! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for every one, to use safety restraints.

3-34

Seats and Restraints


9 Warning

? What are the different types of

Never do this. Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Se cure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to se cure a forward-facing child re straint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child re straint in the right front seat, al ways move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go.

add-on child restraints? ! Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle's owner, are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child's weight, height, and age but also whether or not the re straint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. For most basic types of child re straints, there are many different models available. When purchas ing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor ve hicle. The restraint manufacturer's in structions that come with the re straint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child re straint. In addition, there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs.

Seats and Restraints


9 Warning
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during a crash, infants need complete support. This is be cause an infant's neck is not fully developed and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant's body, the back and shoulders. In fants should always be secured in rear-facing child restraints.

3-35

9 Warning
A young child's hip bones are still so small that the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. In stead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young chil dren should always be secured in appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat


A rear-facing infant seat(A) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

3-36

Seats and Restraints


Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle 9 Warning
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the ve hicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle safety belt or LATCH sys tem, following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual. To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat


A forward-facing child seat(B) pro vides restraint for the child's body with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats


A booster seat(C) is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the ve hicle's safety belt system. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.

Tethers for Children (LATCH System) (All Other Markets) 3 3-38 for more information. Children can be endan gered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

Seats and Restraints


When securing an add-on child re straint, refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a re placement copy from the manufac turer. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a colli sion or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly se cure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it.

3-37

Where to Put the Restraint


According to accident statistics, chil dren and infants are safer when prop erly restrained in a child restraint sys tem or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child rid ing in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using safety belts. A label on the sun visor says, Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the air bag deploys.

9 Warning
A child in a rear-facing child re straint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger airbag in flates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat. A child in a forward-facing child re straint can be seriously injured or killed if the outboard front passen ger airbag inflates and the passen ger seat is in a forward position. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the outboard front pas senger seat, always move the pas senger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the in structions that came with the child re straint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint 9 Warning


A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child re straint. Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint.

3-38

Seats and Restraints Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) (All Other Markets)
The LATCH system holds a child re straint during driving or in a crash. This system is designed to make in stallation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system. Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is properly installed us ing the anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with that restraint, and also the in structions in this manual. When in stalling a child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never be instal led using only the top tether and an chor. In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you need a child re straint that has LATCH attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its at tachments. The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle. Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether an chors and attachments.

Child restraints and booster seats vary considerably in size, and some may fit in certain seating positions better than others. Always make sure the child restraint is properly secured. Depending on where you place the child restraint and the size of the child restraint, you may not be able to ac cess adjacent safety belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional pas sengers or child restraints. Adjacent seating positions should not be used if the child restraint prevents access to or interferes with the routing of the safety belt. Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure the child restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a colli sion or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly se cure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it, or re move it from the vehicle.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seat ing position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attach ments (B).

Seats and Restraints


Top Tether Anchor
to be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.

3-39

Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations


To assist you in locating the lower an chors, each seating position with lower anchors has two labels, near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and ro tation of the child restraint during driv ing or in a crash. Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor. Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always

Rear Seat
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating po sitions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors.

To assist you in locating the top tether anchors, the top tether anchor symbol is located near the anchor.

3-40

Seats and Restraints


According to accident statistics, chil dren and infants are safer when prop erly restrained in a child restraint sys tem or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint 3 3-37 for addi tional information.

9 Warning
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor. At taching more than one child re straint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash. A child or others could be injured. To reduce the risk of seri ous or fatal injuries during a crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System 9 Warning


Top Tether Anchors
The top tether anchors for the out board rear seating positions are loca ted on the back of the rear seatback. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child re straint will be placed. Do not secure a child restraint in a po sition without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the in structions that come with the child re straint say that the top tether must be attached. If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type child restraint properly using the an chors, or use the vehicle safety belts to secure the restraint, fol lowing the instructions that came with the child restraint and the in structions in this manual.

9 Warning
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if the vehicle has one, after the child re straint has been installed.

Seats and Restraints


Notice Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicles safety belts. This may damage these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH at tachments. Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its stowed position, before folding the seat. Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper anchor location. This system is designed to make in stallation of child restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use the vehicle's safety belts. Instead use the vehicle's anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top tether. 1. Attach and tighten the lower at tachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts. Refer to your child restraint manufacturer in structions and the instructions in this manual. 1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position. Make sure there are no for eign objects around lower an chors. Foreign objects can in terfere with the proper latch ing of the child restraint to the anchors. 1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat. 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child re straint to the lower anchors. 2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether an chor, if equipped. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps: 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

3-41

2.2. You may need to adjust the rear compartment storage panel/cover in the rear cargo area to access the anchors. 2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions:

If the rear outboard seating position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, raise the headrest or head restraint and route the tether under the headrest or head restraint

3-42

Seats and Restraints


and in between the headrest or head restraint posts.

Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash


9 Warning
A crash can damage the LATCH system in the vehicle. A damaged LATCH system may not properly secure the child restraint, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the LATCH system is working properly after a crash, see your dealer to have the system inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash, new LATCH system parts may be needed. New parts and repairs may be neces sary even if the LATCH system was not being used at the time of the crash.

If the rear outboard seating position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether around the headrest or head restraint. 3. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

Securing Child Restraints (Rear Seat)


When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the in structions that came with the child re straint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. Do not secure a child seat in a posi tion without a top tether fitting if a na tional or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instruc tions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be at tached. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.

9 Warning
Safety procedures must always be observed when disposing of the vehicle or vehicle parts. Disposal should only be performed by an authorized service center, to help protect the environment and your health.

Seats and Restraints


If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint 3 3-37 . 1. Put the child restraint on the seat. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child re straint instructions will show you how. be quickly unbuckled if neces sary.

3-43

5. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions re garding the use of the top tether. 6. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, un buckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether fitting, disconnect it.

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could

4. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoul der portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the re tractor. When installing a forwardfacing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. If the child restraint system has a lock-off mechanism, use it to se cure the vehicle safety belt.

Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat without Airbag Off Switch)


This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forwardfacing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint 3 3-37 . A label on the sun visor says, Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the air bag deploys.

3-44

Seats and Restraints


9 Warning

A child in a rear-facing child re straint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger airbag in flates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat. A child in a forward-facing child re straint can be seriously injured or killed if the outboard front passen ger airbag inflates and the passen ger seat is in a forward position. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the outboard front pas senger seat, always move the pas senger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a child re straint, a child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the air bag is off.

Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat with Airbag Off Switch)


This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forwardfacing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint 3 3-37 . There is a switch on the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the outboard front passenger frontal air bag. See Airbag On-Off Switch 3 3-27 for more information, including important safety information. A label on the sun visor says, Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the air bag deploys.

9 Warning
When using a child restraint sys tem on the front passenger seat, the airbag system for the front pas senger seat must be deactivated. If not the triggering of the airbags poses a risk of fatal injury to the child. This is especially the case if rear-facing child restraint systems are used on the front passenger seat.

9 Warning
Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!

Seats and Restraints


9 Warning
A child in a rear-facing child re straint can be seriously injured or killed if the front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously in jured or killed if the front passen ger airbag inflates and the passen ger seat is in a forward position. Even if the airbag switch has turned off the front passenger frontal airbag, no system is failsafe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, al ways move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

3-45

9 Warning
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. For example, the outboard front passenger air bag could inflate even though the airbag on-off switch is turned off. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 3 5-15 for more informa tion, including important safety in formation. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rearfacing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off. If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and

(All Other Markets) 3 3-38 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is se cured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) (All Other Markets) 3 3-38 for top tether anchor locations. Do not secure a child seat in a posi tion without a top tether anchor if a na tional or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instruc tions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anch ored. You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this po sition. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. 1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forwardfacing child restraint. When the airbag on-off switch has turned off the outboard front pas senger airbags, the off indicator in the airbag off light should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.

Tethers for Children (LATCH System)

3-46

Seats and Restraints


straint manufacturer's instructions regrading the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers

See Airbag On-Off Light 3 5-15 . 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child re straint instructions will show you how.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button on the buckle, so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if nec essary.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoul der portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the re tractor. When installing a forwardfacing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. If the child restraint system has a lock-off mechanism, use it to se cure the vehicle safety belt. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child re

for Children (LATCH System) (All Other Markets) 3 3-38 for more information. 6. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, un buckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If you turned the airbag off with the switch, turn on the outboard front pas senger airbag when you remove the child restraint from the vehicle unless the person who will be sitting there is a member of a passenger airbag risk group. See Airbag On-Off Switch 3 3-27 for more information, including important safety information.

Storage

4-1

Storage
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage ........ 4-1 Glove Box ................................. 4-1 Cupholders ............................... 4-1 Front Storage ........................... 4-2 Sunglasses Storage ................. 4-2 Center Console Storage ........... 4-2

Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage
There may be a storage compartment on the instrument panel. Pull the han dle to open.

Glove Box

Additional Storage Features

The inner partition can be stored in the left side groove of the glove box. The glove box is air conditioned and can be used to store items at a lower temperature. The air conditioning must be turned on for the maximum cool air to enter the glove box. Turn the adjustment wheel clockwise to adjust the cool air flow. Close the opening during the winter season to keep cold air from entering the vehi cle.

Cargo Cover ............................. 4-3 Cargo Management System .................................. 4-3 Convenience Net ...................... 4-3

Cupholders
There are cupholders in the center console and in the second row seat armrest. Pull down the armrest to access the cupholders. Lift the glove box handle up to open it. Use the key to lock and unlock the glove box. The inner partition can be removed to store larger items.

Roof Rack System

Roof Rack System ................... 4-4

4-2

Storage Sunglasses Storage


To use the tray, pull up on the upper lever and lift the cover. The console can be used as an arm rest. Open the rear console by lifting the cover of the rear center armrest.

Front Storage

A card holder (A) and a storage com partment (B) are located on the in strument panel.

Open the sunglass holder by pushing on the rear of the cover. Close it by pulling up and pushing un til it latches.

Center Console Storage


Open the front console by pulling up on the lower lever and lifting the cover. Close the front console by lowering the cover and pushing it down until it latches.

Storage

4-3

Additional Storage Features


Cargo Cover
For vehicles with a cargo cover, use it to cover items in the rear of the vehi cle. To remove the cover from the vehicle, pull both ends toward each other. To reinstall, place each end of the cover in the holes behind the rear seat.

Lift the cover up to open and access the storage bin. The cover remains open when lifted. There are floor side trays on both sides of the luggage compartment floor.

Luggage Floor Net

Convenience Net
Small loads can be carried in the op tional convenience net. Do not carry heavy objects. To install the net, hang each loop in the nets upper corners to both an chors of the back panel. Hang the two net hooks in the metal rings on both lower corners of the floor.

Cargo Management System


Notice Do not allow items in the storage area to extend outside the storage area when the cover is closed. Oth erwise, the storage or luggage floor may be damaged. Only store items that fit into the floor storage area or that allow for the cover to be closed. This vehicle has a cargo manage ment system located in the rear of the vehicle.

The luggage floor net can help keep small loads from moving during sharp turns or quick starts and stops. Attach the four net hooks in the metal rings on each corner of the floor.

4-4

Storage
To prevent damage or loss of cargo when driving, check to make sure crossrails and cargo are securely fas tened. Loading cargo on the roof rack will make the vehicles center of grav ity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking, or abrupt maneuvers; otherwise, it may result in loss of control. If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, occasionally stop the vehicle to make sure the cargo re mains in its place. Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading the vehicle. For more information on vehicle ca pacity and loading, see Vehicle Load Limits 3 8-10 .

Roof Rack System


9 Warning
If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is longer or wider than the roof racklike paneling, ply wood, or a mattressthe wind can catch it while the vehicle is be ing driven. The item being carried could be violently torn off, and this could cause a collision and dam age the vehicle. Never carry something longer or wider than the roof rack on top of the vehicle un less using a GM certified acces sory carrier. Notice Loading cargo on the roof rack that weighs more than 100kg (220lbs) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage the vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests evenly between the crossrails, making sure to fasten cargo securely.

Instruments and Controls

5-1

Instruments and Controls


Instrument Panel Overview Controls
Instrument Panel Overview (C140 (RHD)) ........................ 5-3

Steering Wheel Adjustment (C140) ................................... 5-5 Steering Wheel Controls .......... 5-5 Horn ......................................... 5-6 Windshield Wiper/Washer ........ 5-6 Rear Window Wiper/ Washer ................................. 5-7 Headlamp Washer ................... 5-8 Clock ........................................ 5-8 Power Outlets ........................... 5-9 Cigarette Lighter ....................... 5-9 Ashtrays ................................. 5-10

Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators

Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators ............................ 5-10 Instrument Cluster (C140 Diesel KM) .......................... 5-11

Instrument Cluster (C140 Gen RHD GAS KM) ............ 5-12 Speedometer .......................... 5-13 Odometer ............................... 5-13 Trip Odometer ........................ 5-13 Tachometer ............................ 5-13 Fuel Gauge (C140) ................ 5-13 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge ................................. 5-14 Safety Belt Reminders ........... 5-14 Airbag Readiness Light .......... 5-15 Airbag On-Off Light ................ 5-15 Charging System Light ........... 5-17 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 5-17 Service Vehicle Soon Light .... 5-19 Brake System Warning Light .................................... 5-19 Electric Parking Brake Light ... 5-20 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light ...................... 5-20 All-Wheel-Drive Light (AWD Only) ................................... 5-21 Descent Control System Light .................................... 5-21 Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS) Warning Light .................................... 5-22 Ultrasonic Parking Sensor Light .................................... 5-22

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light .......... 5-22 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Light ................... 5-22 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ...................... 5-23 Wait-to-Start Light (Diesel Only) ................................... 5-23 Diesel Particulate Filter Light .................................... 5-23 Engine Oil Pressure Light ...... 5-24 Low Engine Oil Level Light (Diesel Only) ....................... 5-24 Change Engine Oil Light ........ 5-24 Fuel Economy Light ............... 5-25 Low Fuel Warning Light ......... 5-25 Water in Fuel Warning Light (Diesel Only) ....................... 5-25 Immobilizer Light .................... 5-25 Engine Overspeed Warning Light .................................... 5-26 High-Beam On Light ............... 5-26 Automatic Headlamp Leveling System Light ......... 5-26 Front Fog Lamp Light ............. 5-26 Rear Fog Lamp Light ............. 5-27 Cruise Control Light ............... 5-27 Trailer Indicator Light ............. 5-27 Door Ajar Light ....................... 5-27

5-2

Instruments and Controls

Anti-theft Alarm System ......... 5-27 Gate Ajar Light ....................... 5-28

Vehicle Messages

Warning Buzzers .................... 5-28

Instruments and Controls

5-3

Instrument Panel Overview

Instrument Panel Overview (C140 (RHD))

5-4

Instruments and Controls


F. Instrument Cluster (C140 Diesel KM) 3 5-11 Instrument Cluster 3 5-12 . G. Horn 3 5-6 . H. Windshield Wiper/Washer (C140) 3 5-6 . Q. Steering Wheel Controls 3 5-5 . Phone Buttons (If Equipped). . R. Steering Wheel Adjustment (C140) 3 5-5 . S. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out of View). See Malfunction Indicator Lamp 3 5-17. T. Cruise Control 3 8-31 (If Equip ped). Climate Control Buttons (If Equip ped). . U. Hood Release. See Hood 3 9-3 . V. Coin Storage. See Front Storage 3 4-2 . W. Cardholder. See Front Storage 3 4-2 . X. Power Mirrors 3 2-9 .

A. Air Vents 3 7-1 . B. Hazard Warning Flashers 3 6-3 . Electronic Stability Control (ESC). See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 3 8-28 . C. Driver Information Center (DIC) Display (If Equipped). . Instrument Panel Storage (If Equipped). See Instrument Panel Storage 3 4-1. D. Descent Control System (DCS). See Descent Control System (DCS) 3 8-29 . Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light. See Safety Belt Reminders 3 5-14 . E. Turn and Lane-Change Lever. See Turn and Lane-Change Signals ( 3 6-3 . Exterior Lamp Controls 3 6-1 . Front Fog Lamps 3 6-4. Rear Fog Lamps 3 6-4 .

(C140 Gen RHD GAS KM)

Rear Window Wiper/Washer 3 5-7 . I. Airbag On-Off Indicator (If Equip ped). See Airbag On-Off Light 3 5-15 . J. Glove Box 3 4-1 . K. AM-FM Radio L. Climate Control Systems (If Equipped). Automatic Climate Control System (If Equipped) . M. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission 3 8-22 . N. ECO Button. See Fuel Economy Mode 3 8-24. O. Parking Brake 3 8-26 . P. Cigarette Lighter 3 5-9 .

Headlamp Washer (C140 ) 3 5-8 (If Equipped). Instrument Panel Illumination Control 3 6-5 . Headlamp Range Adjustment 3 6-2 .

Instruments and Controls

5-5

Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment (C140)

Tilt and Telescoping Wheel For vehicles with a tilt and telescoping wheel: 1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever (A) down. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down. 3. Pull or push the steering wheel closer or away from you. 4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock the steering wheel in place. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Steering Wheel Controls


Tilt Wheel For vehicles with a tilt wheel: 1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever (A) down. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down. 3. Pull the lever (A) up to lock the steering wheel in place. For vehicles equipped with audio steering wheel controls, basic audio system operations can be performed.

PWR: Press to turn the system on and off. Press for a short time to mute. Press again to cancel mute. VOL Q : Press to increase the volume level. VOL R : Press to decrease the vol ume level. SEEK: Press and release while using the radio, or CD player to do one of the following: Radio: Press the SEEK button for a short time to search stored radio channels. (CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH1).

5-6

Instruments and Controls


MIST: For a single wipe, briefly move the lever down, and release. The lever automatically returns to its start ing position. Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Damaged blades should be replaced. SeeWiper Blade Replacement 3 9-24. Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. A circuit breaker stops them until the motor cools.

Press the SEEK button for a long time to search for the next receivable higher station. CD player: Press the SEEK button for a short time to go to the next track. (Track01 Track02 ). Press the SEEK button for a long time to fast play. MODE: Press the MODE button to change mode. (FM1 FM2 FM-A AM-1 AM-2 AM-A CDP FM1.) CDP displays when the CD is in the CD player.

Horn
Press near a horn symbol or press on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn.

Move the lever to one of the following positions: HI: Fast wipes. LO: Slow wipes. INT (Intermittent): Move to this posi tion for a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the band on the windshield wiper to ward F for more frequent wipes or S for less frequent wipes. The wipe cycle delay time is affected by the ve hicle speed. As the vehicle speed in creases, the delay time will automati cally decrease. OFF: Turns the windshield wipers off.

Automatic Windshield Wipers with Rainsense

Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wiper lever is located on the side of the steering column. The ignition must be turned to ACC/ ACCESSORY or ON/RUN to operate the windshield wipers.

For vehicles with automatic wind shield wipers with Rainsense, the rain sensor detects the amount of water on the windshield and automatically adjusts the windshield wipers.

Instruments and Controls


Windshield Washer To use this feature the ignition must be turned to ON/RUN. Pull the wind shield washer/wiper lever toward you to spray washer fluid on the wind shield. When the lever is pulled and immedi ately released, windshield washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield, but the windshield wipers do not turn on. When the lever is pulled and held briefly, windshield washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield. The wip ers operate for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and one more cycle after three seconds. See Washer Fluid 3 9-19 for information on filling the windshield washer fluid.

5-7

Rear Window Wiper/Washer


The vehicle may have a rear window wiper/washer. The ignition must be in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position to operate the rear window wiper/washer.

AUTO: Turns the windshield wipers on automatically. The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted by turning the band on the windshield wiper lever toward F or S. If the ignition switch is turned to ACC/ ACCESSORY while the wiper lever is in the AUTO position, the windshield wipers turn on once to check the sys tem. OFF: Turns the automatic windshield wiper system off. The rain sensor is located near the top of the windshield and must be free from dust and dirt to work properly.

9 Warning
In freezing weather, do not use the washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the wind shield, blocking your vision.

Turn the end of the windshield wiper lever to operate the rear window wiper/washer. OFF = Turns the system off. INT = Intermittent wipes. LO = Slow wipes. To spray washer fluid on the rear win dow, press the button at the end of the lever until the washers begin. When

5-8

Instruments and Controls Clock


The clock is located above the radio. When the ignition is in ACC/ACCES SORY or ON/RUN, the clock displays the time. The clock has three adjust ing buttons. H: Hour button. To advance one hour, press the H button. To advance more than one hour, press and hold the H button until you reach the correct hour. M: Minute button. To advance one minute, press the M button. To advance more than one minute, press and hold the M button until you reach the correct minute. R: Reset button. To reset the time to the nearest hour, press the R button.

the button is released, the washers stop, but the wipers continue to wipe for about three wipes.

9 Warning
In freezing weather, do not use the washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the wind shield, blocking your vision. Rear Smart Wiper For vehicles with this feature, the rear wiper turns on automatically when the shift lever is set to R (Reverse) while the front wiper is on. The windshield washer reservoir is used for the windshield and rear win dow. Check the fluid level if either washer is not working. See Washer Fluid 3 9-19 . The headlamp washer button is loca ted on the instrument panel near the exterior lamp control. The headlamps must be turned on to use this feature. Press the button to wash the head lamps. Washer fluid is sprayed onto the headlamps. Then the headlamp washer is disabled for about two mi nutes. If the washer fluid is low, the washer system cannot be turned on for about four minutes after spraying. See Washer Fluid 3 9-19 for more information.

Headlamp Washer
The vehicle may have headlamp washers. The headlamp washers clear debris from the headlamp len ses.

Instruments and Controls


If you press this button when the time is between 8:00 and 8:29 for example, the display will reset to 8:00. If you press this button while the time is between 8:30 and 8:59 for example, the display will reset to 9:00.

5-9

9 Warning
Power is always supplied to the outlets. Do not leave electrical equipment plugged in when the vehicle is not in use because the vehicle could catch fire and cause injury or death. Notice Leaving electrical equipment plug ged in for an extended period of time while the vehicle is off will drain the battery. Always unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating. Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could overload ve hicle or adapter fuses. If a problem is experienced, see your dealer. When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equip ment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 3 8-46.

Notice Hanging heavy equipment from the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. The power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only, such as cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette Lighter
For vehicles with a cigarette lighter, it is located below the climate control system. The ignition must be turned to ACC/ ACCESSORY or ON/RUN. To activate the cigarette lighter, push it into the heating element and let go. When the lighter is ready it will pop back out. Notice Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating does not let the lighter back away from the heating element when it is hot. Damage from over heating can occur to the lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.

Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cell phone or an MP3 player. The vehicle has three accessory power outlets: under the climate con trol system, on the rear of the center floor console, and in the rear cargo area. Remove the cover to access and re place when not in use.

5-10 Ashtrays

Instruments and Controls

For vehicles with a removable ashtray and cigarette lighter, the ashtray can be placed into the front console cu pholders. To open the ashtray, lift the lid of the ashtray. After using, close the lid. To empty the ashtray for cleaning, slightly turn the upper part of the ash tray counterclockwise and remove it. Notice If papers, pins, or other flammable items are put in the ashtray, hot cig arettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly dam age the vehicle. Never put flamma ble items in the ashtray.

Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators


Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is wrong before it be comes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the warning lights and gauges could prevent injury. Warning lights come on when there could be a problem with a vehicle function. Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working. Gauges can indicate when there could be a problem with a vehicle function. Often gauges and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there may be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Fol low this manual's advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.

Instruments and Controls Instrument Cluster (C140 Diesel KM)

5-11

5-12

Instruments and Controls

Instrument Cluster (C140 Gen RHD GAS KM)

Instruments and Controls Speedometer


The speedometer shows the vehicle's speed in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).

5-13

Fuel Gauge (C140)

Odometer
The odometer shows how far the ve hicle has been driven in kilometers. The fuel gauge indicates about how much fuel is left in the fuel tank when the ignition is on. An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on. When the indicator nears empty, there is still a little fuel left, but you should get more fuel soon. Here are four things that some own ers ask about. All these things are normal and do not indicate that any thing is wrong with the fuel gauge: At the gas station, the pump shuts off before the gauge reads full. It takes more, or less, fuel to fill up than the gauge reads. For example, the gauge reads half full, but it took more, or less, than half of the tank's capacity to fill it.

Trip Odometer
There are two independent trip odom eters which measure the distances the vehicle has driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero. Trip A and Trip B can be switched by pressing the trip odometer button lo cated in the lower right area of the speedometer. The button located in the lower right area of the speedometer allows switching between the odometer and the trip odometer. To set the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the button.

Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute(rpm). Notice If the engine is operated with the tachometer in the shaded warning area, the vehicle could be damaged, and the damages would not be cov ered by the vehicle warranty. Do not operate the engine with the tachom eter in the shaded warning area.

5-14

Instruments and Controls Safety Belt Reminders


Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light
There is a driver safety belt reminder light on the instrument panel cluster.

The gauge pointer may move while cornering, braking or accelerating. The gauge may not indicate empty when the ignition is turned off.

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge


When the engine is started, this light flashes for several seconds to remind passengers to fasten the safety belt. The light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle may continue with a chime if the passenger remains or becomes unbuckled while the ve hicle is moving. If the passenger safety belt is buck led, neither the chime nor the light comes on. The front passenger safety belt warn ing light may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase, hand bag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device. To turn off the warning light and/or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the safety belt.

The vehicle may have a gauge that shows the engine coolant tempera ture. If the gauge pointer moves toward the H, the engine is too hot. This reading indicates the same thing as the warning light. It means that the engine coolant has overheated. If the vehicle has been operating under normal driving conditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating 3 9-17.

When the engine is started, this light flashes for several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt. The light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle may continue with a chime if the driver remains or be comes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving. If the driver safety belt is already buckled, neither the light nor the chime comes on.

Instruments and Controls Airbag Readiness Light


This light shows if there is an electri cal problem. The system check in cludes the airbag sensor, the preten sioners, the airbag modules, the wir ing, and the crash sensing and diag nostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System 3 3-21 .

5-15

9 Warning
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it means the airbag system might not be working properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid in jury, have the vehicle serviced right away.

Airbag On-Off Light


The airbag readiness light comes on for several seconds when the vehicle is started. If it stays on after the vehicle has been started or comes on while driving, the airbag system may not work properly. Have the vehicle serviced right away. If the vehicle has an airbag on-off switch, it also has a passenger airbag status indicator on the passenger side of the instrument panel, above the glove box.

A. Front Passenger Airbag Systems On B. Front Passenger Airbag Systems Off When the vehicle is started, the pas senger airbag status indicator sym bols for on and off will light for several seconds as a system check. Then, af ter several more seconds, either the on or off symbol will light to let you know the status of the front passen ger frontal and seat-mounted side im pact airbags, and the roof-rail airbag for the front passenger and the pas senger sitting directly behind the front passenger.

The off symbol comes on when the front passenger frontal and seatmounted side impact airbags, and the roof-rail airbag for the front passenger and the passenger sitting directly be hind the front passenger are manually

5-16

Instruments and Controls


9 Warning
If the front passenger airbags are turned off for a person who does not fall under the conditions speci fied in this manual, that person will not have the extra protection of the airbags. In a crash, the airbags will not be able to inflate and help pro tect the person sitting there. In ad dition, the roof-rail airbag will not be able to protect the person sit ting directly behind the front pas senger. Do not turn off the airbags unless the person sitting in the front passenger seat falls under the conditions specified in this manual.

turned off using the airbag on-off switch, located on the side of the in strument panel. The off symbol in the passenger airbag status indicator comes on and stays on as a reminder that the airbags for the front passen ger and the passenger sitting directly behind the front passenger have been turned off. This light will go off when the airbags have been turned on. The belt pretensioners and all the driver airbag systems will remain ac tive. See Airbag On-Off Switch 3 3-27 for more information, including important safety information.

9 Warning
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. For example, the front passenger frontal and seat-mounted side impact air bags, and the roof-rail airbag for the front passenger and the pas senger sitting directly behind the front passenger could inflate even though the airbag on-off switch is turned off. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 3 5-15 for more information, including important safety infor mation.

Instruments and Controls


When the on symbol is lit, it means that the front passenger frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags, and the roof-rail airbag for the front passenger and the passenger sitting directly behind the front passenger are enabled and may inflate. See Airbag On-Off Switch 3 3-27 for more information, including important safety information. If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the airbag on-off switch. See your dealer for service. The light turns off when the engine is started. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the light stays on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem with the electrical charging system. Have it checked by your dealer. Driving while this light is on could drain the battery. If a short distance must be driven with the light on, be sure to turn off all ac cessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.

5-17

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


A computer system called OBDII (OnBoard Diagnostics-Second Genera tion) monitors operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission control sys tems. It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the ve hicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.

Charging System Light

This light comes on when the ignition is on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show it is working. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the check engine light comes on and stays on while the engine is run ning, this indicates that there is an OBD II problem and service is re quired. Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is ap parent. Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This system assists the serv ice technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

The charging system light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show the light is working.

5-18

Instruments and Controls


This light comes on during a malfunc tion in one of two ways: Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increa ses vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. The following can prevent more seri ous damage to the vehicle: Reduce vehicle speed. Avoid hard accelerations. Avoid steep uphill grades. If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible. If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps and see your dealer for service as soon as possible. Light On Steady: An emission control system malfunction has been detec ted on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. The following may correct an emis sion system malfunction: Check that the fuel cap is fully in stalled. See Filling the Tank 3 8-35 . The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmos phere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off. Check that the electrical system is not wet. the system could be wet if the vehicle was driven through a deep puddle of water. The condi tion is usually corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. Check that good quality fuel is used. Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and may cause: stalling

Notice If the vehicle is continually driven with this light on, the emission con trols might not work as well, the ve hicle fuel economy might not be as good, and the engine might not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might not be cov ered by the vehicle warranty. Notice Modifications made to the engine, transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the vehicle or the replace ment of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Perform ance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle's emission controls and can cause this light to come on. Modifi cations to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This could also re sult in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories and Modifications 3 9-2 .

Instruments and Controls


after start-up, stalling when the ve hicle is changed into gear, misfir ing, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up. If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. See Fuel 3 8-34 . The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will also come on to indicate that there is a malfunction in the Diesel Particu late Filter (DPF). If this happens see your dealer. See Diesel Particulate Filter 3 8-20 for more information. If none of the above have made the light turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle. The dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical prob lems that might have developed.

5-19

Service Vehicle Soon Light

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem. Have the brake sys tem inspected right away.

The service vehicle soon light comes on when the ignition is turned to ON/ RUN and goes out after several sec onds. It comes on if a condition exists that may require the vehicle to be taken in for service. If the light comes on and stays on, take the vehicle to your dealer for service as soon as possible.

The Brake System Warning Light should come on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.

9 Warning
The brake system might not be working properly if the brake sys tem warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and care fully stopped, have the vehicle towed for service.

Brake System Warning Light


The vehicle brake system consists of two hydraulic circuits. If one circuit is not working, the remaining circuit can still work to stop the vehicle. For nor mal braking performance, both cir cuits need to be working.

5-20

Instruments and Controls


If the light does not come on, or re mains flashing, see your dealer. For vehicles with the Electric Parking Brake (EPB), this indicator comes on when the EPB switch is released with out pressing the brake pedal. Always press the brake pedal before pressing the EPB switch to release the Electric Parking Brake.

If the light comes on while driving, a chime sounds. Pull off the road and stop. The pedal might be harder to push or go closer to the floor. It might also take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing the Vehicle 3 9-66 .

Electric Parking Brake Light

For vehicles with the Electric Parking Brake (EPB), the parking brake status light comes on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. The parking brake status light comes on when the brake is applied. If the light continues flashing after the park ing brake is released, or while driving, there is a problem with the Electric Parking Brake system.

For vehicles with the Electric Parking Brake (EPB), the parking brake warn ing light should come on briefly when the vehicle is in ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem. If this light comes on, there is a prob lem with a system on the vehicle that is causing the parking brake system to work at a reduced level. The vehi cle can still be driven, but should be taken to a dealer as soon as possible. See Parking Brake 3 8-26 for more information

Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

The ABS warning light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. This is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. If the light comes on while driving, stop as soon as possi ble and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system.

Instruments and Controls


If the light still stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, there are still brakes, but no antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, there are no antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regu lar brakes. See Brake System Warning Light 3 5-19 . This light comes on when there is a malfunction in the All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) system. This light flashes when the AWD sys tem is temporarily disabled. For more information see All-Wheel Drive 3 8-25 .

5-21

Descent Control System Light

All-Wheel-Drive Light (AWD Only)

The All-Wheel-Drive Light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN. If it does not, have the vehicle serv iced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light then goes off.

This light functions as the Descent Control System (DCS) active indica tor and not ready/warning light. When the green DCS light comes on steady, the system is ready for use. When the green light comes on blink ing, the system is active.

The DCS not ready warning light works in the following manner: When the amber light blinks, this in dicates that the DCS is not ready to operate. When the amber DCS light comes on steady, this indicates that there is a malfunction in the system. The blinking and illuminating of the DCS not ready warning light indicates that the brake pads need to cool down. The vehicle should be driven with as little heavy braking as safely possible. The temperature may differ somewhat according to vehicle and driving conditions. See Descent Control System (DCS) 3 8-29 for more information.

5-22

Instruments and Controls


This light comes on to indicate that there is a malfunction in the system. See your dealer for service. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist (UD7 might need service. When this warn ing light is on, the ESC is off and does not limit wheel spin. The light flashes if the system is ac tive and is working to assist the driver with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 3 8-28 for more information.

Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS) Warning Light

For Vehicles with 3 Sensors) 3 8-33 for more information.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light


If this warning light comes on after the vehicle ignition is started or while driv ing, the speed sensitive power steer ing may not be working. See your dealer for service.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Light

Ultrasonic Parking Sensor Light

For vehicles with Electronic Stability Control (ESC), this light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serv iced by your dealer. If the system is working normally the indicator light then turns off. If the light comes on and stays on while driving, there could be a prob lem with the ESC and the vehicle

For vehicles with Electronic Stability Control (ESC), this light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN. If it does not, have the vehicle serv iced by your dealer. If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off.

Instruments and Controls


This light comes on when the ESC system is turned off. The system can be turned off by pressing the ESC control button loca ted on the center of the instrument panel. For more information, see Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 3 8-28 . If the light comes on and stays on while driving, the vehicle may have a problem with the cooling system. Stop the vehicle and turn off the en gine to avoid damage to the engine. See Engine Overheating 3 9-17 for more information.

5-23

Diesel Particulate Filter Light

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

Wait-to-Start Light (Diesel Only)

The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on briefly when the engine is started. If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off. If it does not, have the vehicle serv iced by your dealer. This light indicates that the engine coolant has overheated.

The wait-to-start light shows that the engine is functioning properly. When the light goes out the engine can be started. For more information, see Starting the Diesel Engine 3 8-16 .

This indicator comes on or flashes when the soot particles accumulated in the DPF reach a certain amount. The soot particles need to be burned off to prevent the filter from clogging. When this indicator comes on or flashes, increase speed to more than 50 km/h for about 15 minutes as soon as the road and traffic situations per mit. The indicator goes off as soon as the soot particles are at normal levels. If the engine is shut off while the DPF indicator is on or flashing, increased fuel consumption and a reduction in engine oil life will occur. Please note that the driver should continue the driving regeneration process above until the DPF indicator goes off. See Diesel Particulate Filter 3 8-20 for more information.

5-24

Instruments and Controls


This light should come on briefly when the ignition is turned on as a check to let you know that the light is working. If this light comes on and stays on while the engine is running, it means your engine is low on oil. Check the oil level as soon as possible. See Engine Oil 3 9-7 for further infor mation. Notice Lack of proper engine oil mainte nance can damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule for changing engine oil.

Notice Use of diesel fuel other than Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (15 ppm sulfur maximum) or engine oil other than low ash CJ-4 oil will cause perma nent damage to the DPF and related components. This damage would not be covered by your warranty.

Engine Oil Pressure Light


9 Warning
Do not keep driving if the oil pres sure is low. The engine can be come so hot that it catches fire. Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced. Notice Lack of proper engine oil mainte nance can damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule for changing engine oil.

The oil pressure light should come on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle could be low on oil and might have some other system problem. See your dealer.

Low Engine Oil Level Light (Diesel Only)

Change Engine Oil Light

Instruments and Controls


This light should come on briefly when the engine is started. If it does not come on have the vehicle serv iced by your dealer. When the change engine oil light comes on, it means that service is re quired on the vehicle. See Scheduled Maintenance 3 10-2 and Engine Oil 3 9-7 for more information. After the engine oil is changed, the engine oil life system needs to be re set in order to turn off this light. See Engine Oil Life System 3 9-10 for more information. pressed. Press the switch again to turn off the light and exit the fuel saver mode.

5-25

Low Fuel Warning Light

When the water level in the fuel filter exceeds a certain level, this warning light comes on. If this condition oc curs, immediately drain the water from the fuel filter. For the drain procedures, see Water in Fuel 3 8-34. The warning light goes off when the draining is complete. Notice Driving when this warning indicator is on, can damage the fuel injection system and the engine. If the indica tor comes on right after a refuel, it means water was pumped into the fuel tank. Turn off the engine imme diately. Then, have the water drained at once.

Fuel Economy Light

The low fuel warning light, below the fuel gauge, comes on briefly when the engine is started. This light also comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel. When fuel is added, the light should go off. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced.

Water in Fuel Warning Light (Diesel Only)


For vehicles with the fuel economy mode light, it comes on when the eco (economy) switch, located on the center console near the shifter, is

Immobilizer Light

5-26

Instruments and Controls


For vehicles equipped with the over speed warning light, it flashes and a chime sounds to alert the driver to reduce the vehicle's speed when the vehicle goes over 120km/h. The light will then turn off when the vehicles speed is reduced below 120km/h.

The immobilizer light should come on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally the indicator light turns off. This light comes on when the ignition is turned from LOCK/OFF to ON/RUN and stays on if the vehicle is immobi lized. This happens when an incorrect key or an unprogrammed key is used to start the vehicle. If the light stays on and the engine does not start, there could be a prob lem with the theft-deterrent system. See Immobilizer Operation 3 2-8 for more information.

Automatic Headlamp Leveling System Light

High-Beam On Light

For vehicles with this light, if it comes on while driving, there is a problem with the vehicle headlamp leveling system. See your dealer for service. See Headlamp Range Adjustment 3 6-2 for more information.

Engine Overspeed Warning Light

The high-beam on light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 3 6-2 for more informa tion.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with front fog lamps, this light comes on when the front fog lamps are in use.

Instruments and Controls


The light goes out when the front fog lamps are turned off. See Front Fog Lamps 3 6-4 for more information. This light may come on with an amber color when the cruise control ON/OFF button is pressed. The light comes on green when the cruise control is set. The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off. See Cruise Control 3 8-31 for more informa tion.

5-27

Door Ajar Light

Rear Fog Lamp Light

Trailer Indicator Light


If your vehicle has rear fog lamps, this light will come on when they are in use. For more information see Rear Fog Lamps ( 3 6-4 .

This light comes on when a door is open or not securely latched.

Anti-theft Alarm System

Cruise Control Light

The trailer indicator light comes on when a trailer is connected to the ve hicle. It goes out again when the trailer is disconnected. See Trailer Towing 3 8-40 for more information.

For vehicles with an additional antitheft system related to Thatcham in surance, the anti-theft off indicator comes on to indicate that the intrusion and inclination sensor is disabled. This system can be disabled by pressing the button located on the headliner. Press the button again and the indicator goes out.

5-28

Instruments and Controls

See Anti-theft Alarm System 3 2-7 for more information.

Vehicle Messages
Warning Buzzers
There are different times when you may hear a warning buzzer. While driving, you may hear a warn ing buzzer when operating the turn signals, or if the driver or passenger safety belt is not buckled when the seat is occupied and vehicle speed exceeds 22km/h(14mph). When the vehicle is parked and the driver door is open, you will hear a warning buzzer if the exterior lamps are left on or the key is in the ignition.

Gate Ajar Light

If this light comes on, the liftgate is open or not completely latched. Driv ing with the liftgate open can cause carbon monoxide (CO) to enter the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust 3 8-20 for more information.

Lighting

6-1

Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls ............ 6-1 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder .............................. 6-2 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ................................ 6-2 Flash-to-Pass ........................... 6-2 Headlamp Range Adjustment ............................ 6-2 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .................................... 6-3 Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 6-3 Turn and Lane-Change Signals .................................. 6-3 Front Fog Lamps ...................... 6-4 Rear Fog Lamps ...................... 6-4

Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls

Turn the exterior lamp control at the end of the lever to the following posi tions: OFF or O : Turns all the lamps off. ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps, together with the fol lowing:

Version Shown, without AUTO

Taillamps License Plate Lamp Instrument Panel Lights 5 (Headlamps): Turns on the head lamps, together with the following: Taillamps License Plate Lamp Instrument Panel Lights Parking Lamps AUTO: For vehicles with automatic headlamps, the lamps turn on or off automatically depending on how dark it is outside. To turn the automatic lamp control off, turn the exterior lamp control to O . The control automatically returns to its original position when released.

Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination Control .................................. 6-5 Dome Lamps ............................ 6-5 Reading Lamps ........................ 6-6

Version Shown, w/AUTO


The turn signal/multifunction lever lo cated on the side of the steering col umn operates the exterior lamps.

Lighting Features

Battery Power Protection ......... 6-6

6-2

Lighting Headlamp Range Adjustment

To turn the automatic lamp control on, turn the control to the O position again. Do not cover the sensor located on top of the instrument panel or the au tomatic headlamps will not work prop erly.

Exterior Lamps Off Reminder


A warning chime sounds, if the driver door is opened while the ignition is off and the exterior lamps control is in the ; or 5 position. If the lamps are turned off while the warning is chiming and then turned back on, you will not hear a warning chime.

This indicator light turns on in the in strument panel cluster when the highbeam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-Pass
The flash-to-pass feature works with the low beams or Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on or off. To flash the high beams, pull the turn signal/lane change lever all the way toward you, then release it. For vehicles with manual headlamp leveling, the control is located on the outboard side of the steering column. This feature lets the headlamp range be adjusted to suit the vehicle load. The low-beam headlamps must be on to adjust the headlamp leveling. 0 = Front seat occupied. 1 = All seats occupied. 2 = All seats occupied and load in the luggage compartment. 3 = Driver seat occupied and load in the luggage compartment.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer


Push the turn signal/lane change lever away from you to turn the high beams on. Pull the lever toward you to return to low beams.

Lighting Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)


For vehicles with Daytime Running Lamps (DRL), it makes it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. The DRL come on au tomatically when the engine is star ted. The DRL system will turn off under the following conditions: The ignition is off. The parking lamps are on. The low-beam headlamps are on.

6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers

is opened and closed, the hazard warning button will light up for about 10 minutes.

Turn and Lane-Change Signals

The hazard warning flasher button is located on the instrument panel above the audio system. | Hazard Warning Flasher: Press to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns others that you are having trouble. Press the button again to turn the flashers off. The hazard warning button will be lit, when a door is opened. If the key is removed from the ignition and a door

An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.

6-4

Lighting
Turn the band to # to turn the front fog lamps on. The band automatically re turns to its starting position when re leased. The front fog lamp indicator light comes on in the instrument panel cluster. See Front Fog Lamp Light 3 5-26 . To turn the front fog lamps off, turn the band to # again. The fog lamp indi cator light will go off. For vehicles with automatic head lamps, the parking lamps and lowbeam headlamps come on when turn ing on the front fog lamps. For vehicles with rear fog lamps, they are controlled by the s band located on the middle of the turn signal/multi function lever. To use the rear fog lamps, the lowbeam headlamps or parking lamps and the front fog lamps must be on. Turn the band to s to turn the rear fog lamps on. The band automatically re turns to its starting position when re leased. The rear fog lamp indicator light comes on in the instrument panel cluster. See Front Fog Lamp Light 3 5-26 . To turn the rear fog lamps off, turn the band to s again. The rear fog lamp indicator light will go off. For vehicles with automatic head lamps, the parking lamps and lowbeam headlamps come on when turn ing on the rear fog lamps.

Raise or lower the lever until the ar row starts to flash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change is completed. The arrow flashes automatically three times. The lever returns to its starting posi tion whenever it is released.

Front Fog Lamps

Rear Fog Lamps


For vehicles with front fog lamps, they are controlled by the # band located on the middle of the turn signal/multi function lever. To use the front fog lamps, the lowbeam headlamps or parking lamps must be on.

Lighting

6-5

Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination Control
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamps come on when a door or the liftgate is opened. The lamps will stay on for about five mi nutes. If the door or liftgate is closed, the lamps gradually dim after about 10 seconds and then turn off. To dim or brighten the instrument panel lights, press the button and turn it clockwise or counterclockwise.

* (Dome Lamp Override): Press to keep the dome lamps and other inte rior lamps turned off while any door is open. Press again to return it to the out position and the lamps automati cally come on when any door is opened.

Dome Lamps
Press the button on the dome lamp to turn it on or off.

6-6

Lighting

Reading Lamps

Lighting Features
Battery Power Protection
This feature shuts off the headlamps, parking lamps, fog lamps, etc. if they are left on when the ignition is moved to the LOCK/OFF position. This helps to prevent the battery from running down. Battery rundown protection will not work if the lamps are turned on again after this feature operated.

( / ) : Press the button near each lamp to turn the reading lamps on or off.

Climate Controls

7-1

Climate Controls
Air Vents
AIR VENTS .............................. 7-1

Heating

HEATING ................................. 7-7

Air Vents
Side vents You can direct air through both ad justable side vents toward either side of the front passenger area, or toward the side windows.

Ventilation

VENTILATION .......................... 7-7 DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING ........................ 7-8

Defrosting and Defogging

Control Panel

CONTROL PANEL ................... 7-2 TEMPERATURE CONTROL KNOB .................................... 7-3 FAN CONTROL KNOB ............ 7-3 AIR DISTRIBUTION MODE KNOB .................................... 7-3 RECIRCULATION MODE BUTTON ............................... 7-4

Automatic Climate Control (option)

Air Conditioning

AIR CONDITIONING ................ 7-5 A/C BUTTON ........................... 7-6 COOLING ................................. 7-6

GENERAL DESCRIPTION ...... 7-9 DISPLAY PANEL ..................... 7-9 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL .......................... 7-10 MANUAL CONTROL .............. 7-11 DEFROSTING ........................ 7-12 OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY ............................. 7-12 TEMPERATURE UNIT CHANGE ............................ 7-12

Operating Tips for Ventilation System

OPERATING TIPS FOR VENTILATION SYSTEM .... 7-13

1. Side vent 2. Windshield defroster vent 3. Center vent 4. Floor vent 5. Front door window defroster vent Windshield defroster vents The windshield defroster vents direct air onto the windshield.

7-2

Climate Controls

Center vents You can control the direction of air flow through both adjustable center vents. Floor vents The floor vents direct air into the front foot area. Front door window defroster vents The front door window defroster vents direct air onto the side windows, mainly in the area near the outside mirror. Rear vents* Cooled or heated air travels to the rear foot area through ducts under neath the front seats. To shut off the centre vents and the side vents Turn the wheel below or next to each vent outlet to block the airflow through the vents.

Control Panel
1. 2. 3. 4. Temperature control knob. Fan control knob. Air distribution mode knob. Air conditioning (A/C) button*. See AIR CONDITIONING 3 7-5 later in this section. 5. Recirculation button. 6. Rear window and outside mirror defroster button. See REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIR ROR DEFROSTER BUTTON in the index.

Climate Controls TEMPERATURE CONTROL KNOB


The temperature control knob con trols the temperature of the air that comes through the air vents. Turn the knob to the blue area to get cool air and to the red area to get warm air. knob clockwise to increase the fan speed and counterclockwise to de crease the fan speed. The fan control knob is adjustable from the off position through to step 4.

7-3

Front ( E) This setting directs air through center and side vents.

AIR DISTRIBUTION MODE KNOB FAN CONTROL KNOB


You may control the rate of airflow coming from the system by turning the fan speed control knob. Turn the Adjust the air distribution knob to the desired mode which you want to di rect the air flow. The air distribution knob can be set in one of five positions:

7-4

Climate Controls
Defrost ( 1) Directs most of the air through the windscreen and front door window defroster vents. A small amount of air is also directed to the side vents.

Bi-level ( () Directs air in two ways. Half of the air through the floor vents and the re maining through the center and side vents.

Floor ( 5) Directs most of the air through the floor vents. Some of the air will also be directed to the windscreen de froster vents, side vents, and rear vents. Keep the area under the front seats clear in order not to block the airflow to the rear compartment.

Floor/Defrost ( ) This mode directs most of the air through windscreen defroster vents, front door window defroster vents and the floor vents. A small amount of air is also directed to the side vents.

RECIRCULATION MODE BUTTON


Press this button when driving in dusty conditions or to avoid traffic pol lution or outside fumes, and when quick cooling or heating of the pas senger area is required. The indicator light will illuminate and interior air will be recirculated.

Climate Controls
Pressing the recirculation mode but ton again will draw outside air into the passenger compartment. The indica tor will go out. Your windows may fog if you use the recirculation mode for extended peri ods. If this happens, press the recir culation button again for the outside air mode.

7-5

9 Caution
Driving with recirculation mode for prolonged period of time can make you sleepy. Periodically turn to the outside air mode for fresh air.

Air Conditioning
The refrigeration unit of the air condi tioning (A/C) system cools and re moves moisture, dust, and pollen from the air inside your vehicle. Even with the A/C on, your vehicle will produce warm air if you set the tem perature control knob to warm. Notice You may notice water drip under en gine room sometimes after driving with A/C on. This is normal because your cooling system removes the moisture from the air. Notice Because the compressor of the cool ing system shares the engine power, you may notice slight change in en gine power and performance when the compressor operates.

7-6

Climate Controls
To turn on the air conditioning (A/C): 1. Start the engine. 2. Press A/C button. (Indicator light will come on to confirm the A/C is running) 3. Adjust fan speed. Notice The air conditioning will not operate when the fan control knob is in the off position. To turn off the A/C: Press A/C button again. (Indicator light will go off to confirm the A/C is not running) 3. Press recirculation button. (Indi cator illuminates) 4. Turn air distribution knob to FRONT mode ( E). 5. Turn temperature control knob all the way to the blue area for cool ing. 6. Turn fan control knob to highest speed. Normal cooling 1. Turn on the air conditioning (A/C) button. (Indicator illuminates) 2. Press recirculation button. (Indi cator illuminates) 3. Turn the air distribution knob to FRONT ( E) or BI-LEVEL ( (). 4. Turn temperature control knob to blue area for cooling. 5. Adjust the fan control knob to the desired speed.

A/C BUTTON
9 Caution
Using your air conditioning (A/C) system while driving up long hills or in heavy traffic can cause the engine overheating. (See OVER HEATING in the index) Watch temperature gauge. Turn OFF the A/C if the gauge indicates engine overheating. Vehicle can be damaged.

COOLING
Maximum cooling To achieve maximum cooling during hot weather and when your vehicle has been exposed to the sun for a long time: 1. Open windows slightly to let warm air escape. 2. Turn air conditioning (A/C) on. (In dicator illuminates)

Climate Controls

7-7

Heating
Maximum heating Use the maximum heating mode for quick heating of the passenger area. Do not use it for lengthy periods be cause the interior air may become stale and the windows may fog. To clear the windows, turn off the recir culation button to allow fresh air into the vehicle. For maximum heating: 1. Turn off air conditioning (A/C). (In dicator goes off) 2. Press recirculation button. (Indi cator illuminates) 3. Turn air distribution knob to BILEVEL ( () or FLOOR (5 ). 4. Turn temperature control knob all the way to the red area for heat ing. 5. Turn fan control knob to maximum speed.

Normal heating 1. Turn off air conditioning (A/C). (In dicator goes off) 2. Turn off recirculation. (Indicator goes off) 3. Turn air distribution knob to FLOOR ( 5) or BI-LEVEL ( (). 4. Turn temperature control knob to red area for heating. 5. Turn fan control knob to desired speed.

Ventilation
Bi-level Use this setting on cool, but sunny days. Warmer air will flow into the floor area and cool, outside air will flow toward your upper body. To use this setting: 1. Turn off recirculation button. (In dicator goes off) 2. Turn air distribution knob to BILEVEL ( (). 3. Adjust temperature control knob to the desired temperature. 4. Turn fan control knob to the de sired speed. Ventilation To direct air through the center and side vents: 1. Turn off air conditioning (A/C). (In dicator goes off) 2. Turn off recirculation. (Indicator goes off) 3. Turn the air distribution knob to FRONT (E ) or BI-LEVEL (( ).

7-8

Climate Controls

4. Turn temperature control knob to blue area for cooling. 5. Turn temperature control knob to blue area for cooling. 6. Turn fan control knob to desired speed.

Defrosting and Defogging


To defrost the windscreen: 1. Turn the air distribution knob to DEFROST ( 1). 2. Turn temperature control knob to red area for warm air. 3. Adjust the fan control knob to highest speed for quick defrost ing. Notice The A/C and outside air mode are automatically turned on to improve the performance of the defroster when you select DEFROST ( 1) or FLOOR/ DEFROST ( ) mode. To keep the windshield clear and di rect warm air through floor, turn the air distribution knob to FLOOR/DE FROST ( ).

9 Caution
The difference between the out side air and the temperature of the windshield can cause the windows to fog, thereby restricting your front vision. Do not use FLOOR/DEFROST ( ) or DEFROST ( 1) in ex tremely humid weather when the temperature control knob is set to the blue area. This can lead to an accident which can damage your vehicle and cause personal injuries.

Climate Controls

7-9

Automatic Climate Control (option)


GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Full automatic temperature control (FATC) system controls the interior temperature in your vehicle automat ically and provides a the greatest amount of comfort in the interior re gardless of the weather, outside tem perature or season. It will achieve the desired temperature when you select the AUTO mode. The desired temperature is controlled by an in-car sensor signal, coolant temperature, sun sensor signal and the ambient temp. sensor signal. Sunlight sensor Sunlight sensor is located in front of the windshield defroster vents. This sensor detects sunlight when operat ing in AUTO mode. Do not cover the sensor in order not to get wrong in formation.

Temperature sensor Temperature information sampled from the interior of your car is used in establishing ventilation system re quirements when operating in AUTO mode.

DISPLAY PANEL
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Set temperature Defroster indicator Air distribution mode indicator Air conditioning indicator Outside temperature Auto mode indicator Outside air mode indicator Recirculation mode indicator Fan operation indicator Fan speed indicator

9 Caution
Do not place stickers over the tem perature sensor as this will impair its function.

7-10

Climate Controls

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL


When you operate your FATC in AUTO mode, the only thing you have to do is just set the desired tempera ture to your preference. AUTO button When the AUTO button is pressed, the interior temperature will be con trolled automatically to reach the de sired preset temperature. The system will control air distribution mode, fan speed, air conditioning and recircula tion functions automatically. AUTO mode indicator will appear in the DIC (Driver Information Center) located in the center of the instrument panel.

To set the desired temperature Rotate the temperature control knob until the desired temperature is dis played. Clockwise : The desired temperature will increase by 0.5C(1F). Counterclockwise : The desired tem perature will decrease by 0.5C(1F). You can set the desired temperature at your preference between 18C and 32C.

Notice When desired temperature is set at Lo (minimum), the fan operates continuously at highest speed even after the interior temperature rea ches the preset temperature. To turn off the system, press the OFF button.

Climate Controls

7-11

MANUAL CONTROL
A/C button Turns the air conditioning on or off. AUTO mode is cancelled and indica tor will go off when this button is pressed. The A/C indicator (# ) will illuminate when the air conditioning is on. Press the A/C button again to turn the A/C off, or press the OFF button to turn the entire system off. Refer to A/C BUTTON 3 7-6 earlier in this section

Air distribution mode change If the MODE button is pressed, AUTO mode is cancelled and the air distribution mode will be changed in the following sequence. FRONT( E) BI-LEVEL(( ) FLOOR(5 ) FLOOR/DE FROST( ) Refer to AIR DISTRIBUTION MODE KNOB 3 7-3 earlier in this section for more information.

Recirculation mode button Selects either outside air or recircula ted inside air. Refer to RECIRCULATION MODE BUTTON 3 7-4 earlier in this section.

7-12

Climate Controls
Refer to DEFROSTING AND DE FOGGING 3 7-8 earlier in this sec tion.

Fan speed control knob Adjust the fan speed by rotating this knob. AUTO mode is cancelled when this knob is rotated.

TEMPERATURE UNIT CHANGE OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY


The outside temperature is always displayed in the DIC. Refer to DRIVER INFORMATION CENTER in the index. The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area. Due to its location, the displayed tem perature can be affected by road or engine heat while slow driving or idling. To change the temperature unit, do the followings: 1. Press SET button on the driver in formation center for more than 2 seconds. The temperature unit will blink. 2. Press the Q or R button to change the temperature unit (C F).

DEFROSTING
Press the DEFROST button ( 1) to defrost the windscreen. The A/C and outside air mode are automatically turned on. Adjust the fan speed using fan speed control knob. This mode can be cancelled by press ing the defrost button again, air distri bution mode knob or AUTO button.

Climate Controls

7-13

Operating Tips for Ventilation System


If your vehicle has been parked in di rect sunlight, open the windows be fore turning on the air conditioning (A/ C). To clear foggy windows on rainy days or in high humidity, decrease the hu midity using the A/C. Turn on the A/C system for a few mi nutes at least once a week, even in winter or when the A/C system is not being used regularly. This maintains proper lubrication of the compressor and the seals and will prolong the service life of the system. Driving in stop-and-go traffic may re duce the effectiveness of the A/C sys tem. The A/C compressor does not oper ate when the fan control knob is turned off. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioner filter, proper maintenance is required. See AIR CONDITIONER FILTER in the index. This filter re

moves dust, pollen and other airborne irritants from the outside air which is drawn into your vehicle. Rear Air Condition You can turn on rear air condition by press REAR A/C button at front panel.

Once the light at botton come up, means the rear air condition is being turn on. However, the rear air condi toon will not start working if rear blower switch is being Step 0

7-14

Climate Controls
Notice Rear blower switch will operate but the air conditioning system will not operate when Rear A/C switch on and A/C switch off. Rear blower switch and the air con ditioning system will operate when Rear A/C switch on and A/C switch off.

Once you rotate knob switch to step 1, 2 or 3 the air flow will come out from Grille panel. The rear air condition is being work. The air flow speed will depend on blower step. Notice Rear blower switch will not operate when Rear A/C switch off and A/C switch off. Rear blower switch will not operate when Rear A/C switch off and A/C switch on.

Step Air Flow

1 Low

2 Middle

3 High

Driving and Operating

8-1

Driving and Operating


Driving Information
Driving for Better Fuel Economy ............................... 8-2 Drunk Driving ........................... 8-2 Control of a Vehicle .................. 8-3 Braking ..................................... 8-3 Steering .................................... 8-4 Off-Road Recovery .................. 8-5 Loss of Control ......................... 8-5 Driving on Wet Roads .............. 8-6 Highway Hypnosis .................... 8-6 Hill and Mountain Roads .......... 8-7 Winter Driving ........................... 8-7 If the Vehicle Is Stuck ............... 8-9 Vehicle Load Limits ................ 8-10 New Vehicle Break-In ............. 8-13 Ignition Positions .................... 8-14 Starting the Gasoline Engine ................................. 8-15 Starting the Diesel Engine ...... 8-16 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) .................................. 8-17

Shifting Into Park .................... 8-18 Shifting out of Park ................. 8-19 Parking over Things That Burn .................................... 8-20

Continuous Damping Control (CDC) .................................. 8-30 Automatic Level Control ......... 8-30

Engine Exhaust

Cruise Control

Engine Exhaust ...................... 8-20 Diesel Particulate Filter .......... 8-20 Running the Vehicle While Parked ................................ 8-21

Cruise Control ........................ 8-31

Object Detection Systems

Automatic Transmission

Ultrasonic Parking Assist (UD7 - For Vehicles with 3 Sensors) .......................... 8-33

Automatic Transmission ......... 8-22 Manual Mode ......................... 8-24 Fuel Economy Mode .............. 8-24 All-Wheel Drive ...................... 8-25

Fuel

Drive Systems Brakes

Starting and Operating

Antilock Brake System (ABS) .................................. 8-25 Parking Brake ......................... 8-26 Brake Assist ........................... 8-28 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................................. 8-28 Descent Control System (DCS) .................................. 8-29 Limited-Slip Differential .......... 8-30

Fuel ........................................ 8-34 Fuel for Petrol Engines ........... 8-34 Fuel for Diesel Engines .......... 8-34 Water in Fuel .......................... 8-34 Running Out of Fuel ............... 8-35 Filling the Tank ....................... 8-35 Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............................ 8-36 General Towing Information ... 8-37 Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips ........................ 8-37 Trailer Towing ........................ 8-40 Weight of the Trailer ............... 8-41 Weight of the Trailer Tongue ................................ 8-42

Towing

Ride Control Systems

8-2

Driving and Operating

Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires .................................... 8-43 Towing Equipment ................. 8-43 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .... 8-46

Driving Information
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible. Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly. Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops. Avoid idling the engine for long pe riods of time. When road and weather conditions are appropriate, use cruise control. Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when condi tions require. Keep vehicle tires properly inflated. Combine several trips into a single trip. Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near the size. Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.

Drunk Driving
9 Warning
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, percep tions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious or even fatal colli sion if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink. Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global trag edy. Alcohol affects four things that any one needs to drive a vehicle: judg ment, muscular coordination, vision, and attentiveness. The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive.

Conversions and Add-Ons

Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 8-46

Driving and Operating


Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash, that person's chance of being killed or permanently disa bled is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

8-3

Braking
See Brake System Warning Light 3 5-19 . Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time. Actually doing it is reaction time. Average reaction time is about threefourths of a second. But that is only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three sec onds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordi nation, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at 100km/h (60 mph) travels 20m (66ft). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others is important. And, of course, actual stopping dis tances vary greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread;

Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control the vehicle while driving brakes, steering, and accelerator. At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose con trol of the vehicle. Adding non-dealer accessories can affect vehicle performance. See

Accessories and Modifications 3 9-2 .

the condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied. Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts heavy accel eration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and al lowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of unnecessary brak ing. That means better braking and longer brake life. If the engine ever stops while the ve hicle is being driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.

8-4

Driving and Operating


Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.

Adding non-dealer accessories can affect vehicle performance. See

Accessories and Modifications 3 9-2 .

Steering
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost be cause the engine stops or the power steering system is not functioning, the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.

Steering in Emergencies

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at a rea sonable speed. Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road sur face, the angle at which the curve is banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is the one factor that can be controlled. If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering the curve, while the front wheels are straight.

There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For ex ample, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can be avoided by brakingif you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room. That is the time for evasive actionsteering around the problem. The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply the brakes. See Braking 3 8-3 . It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If hold ing the steering wheel at the recom mended 9 and 3o'clock positions, it can be turned a full 180degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the ob ject. The fact that such emergency situa tions are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

Driving and Operating Off-Road Recovery


The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoul der while driving.

8-5

Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systemsbrakes, steering, and accelerationdo not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked. In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.

Skidding

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the ac celerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 in), about one-eighth turn, until the right front tire contacts the pave ment edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the road way.

In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible. The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle's three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose

cornering force. And in the accelera tion skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel, or other ma terial is on the road. For safety, slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance is longer and vehi cle control more limited. While driving on a surface with re duced traction, try to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, in cluding reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You might not realize the sur face is slippery until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning

8-6

Driving and Operating


9 Warning
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pull ing to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle. After driving through a large pud dle of water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally. Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. Driving through flowing water could cause the ve hicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ig nore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water. enough. When the vehicle is hydro planing, it has little or no contact with the road. There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.

cluessuch as enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surfaceand slow down when you have any doubt. Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet Roads


Rain and wet roads can reduce vehi cle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in these types of driving con ditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing water.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips include: Allow extra following distance. Pass with caution. Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled. Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires 3 9-39 . Turn off cruise control.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under the vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast

Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe place to park the vehicle and rest.

Driving and Operating


Other driving tips include: Keep the vehicle well ventilated. Keep interior temperature cool. Keep your eyes moving scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check the rearview mirror and ve hicle instruments often.

8-7

9 Warning
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.

Hill and Mountain Roads


Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in these conditions include: Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape. Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmis sion. Shift to a lower gear when going down steep or long hills.

Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane. Top of hills: Be alert something could be in your lane (stalled car, accident). Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

9 Warning
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.

Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice can occur at about 0C (32F) when freezing rain begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand.

8-8

Driving and Operating


Blizzard Conditions 9 Warning
Snow can trap engine exhaust un der the vehicle. This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. En gine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause un consciousness and even death. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, espe cially any that is blocking the ex haust pipe. Check again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there. Open a window about 5 cm (2 in) on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fresh air. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel. Adjust the climate control sys tem to a setting that circulates the air inside the vehicle and set

Drive with caution, whatever the con dition. Accelerate gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly cau ses the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick, so there is even less traction. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the sur face under the tires even more. The Antilock Brake System (ABS) 3 5-20 improves vehicle stability dur ing hard stops on slippery roads, but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement. Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and watch for slip pery spots. Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice. Turn off cruise control on slippery sur faces.

Being stuck in snow can be a serious situation. Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe: Turn on the hazard warning flash ers. Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.

Driving and Operating


the fan speed to the highest set ting. See Climate Control Sys tem in the Index. For more information about car bon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust 3 8-20 . Snow can trap exhaust gases un der your vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (Carbon Monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could over come you and kill you. You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the exhaust. Run the engine for short periods only as needed to keep warm, but be care ful. To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat. Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm also helps. If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then when you run the en gine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible to save fuel.

8-9

9 Warning
If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. The ve hicle can overheat, causing an en gine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 55km/h (35mph). For information about using tire chains on the vehicle, see Tire Chains 3 9-48 .

If the Vehicle Is Stuck


Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off and use the rock ing method.

8-10

Driving and Operating


weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all nonfactoryinstalled options. Two labels on the vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification label.

Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out

Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction system. Shift back and forth between R(Re verse) and a forward gear, or with a manual transmission, between 1 (First) or 2(Second) and R(Reverse), spinning the wheels as little as possi ble. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning be fore shifting gears. Release the ac celerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the for ward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing the Vehicle 3 9-66 .

Tire and Loading Information Label

9 Warning
Do not load the vehicle any heav ier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the max imum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle han dles. This could cause loss of con trol and a crash. Overloading can also shorten the life of the vehicle.

Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle's center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver door open, you will find the label attached near the door lock post. The Tire and Loading Informa tion label shows the number of occu pant seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

Vehicle Load Limits


It is very important to know how much weight the vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity

Driving and Operating


The Tire and Loading Information la bel also shows the tire size of the orig inal equipment tires (C) and the rec ommended cold tire inflation pres sures (D). For more information on tires and inflation, see Tires 3 9-39 and Tire Pressure 3 9-40 . There is also important loading infor mation on the Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. See Certification La bel later in this section. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For exam ple, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150) = 650lbs). 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loa ded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the availa ble cargo and luggage load ca pacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. See Trailer Towing 3 8-40 for im portant information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and trailering tips.

8-11

Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Ex ample 1 = 453kg (1,000lbs). B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150lbs) 2 = 136kg (300lbs). C. Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = 317kg (700lbs).

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit


1. Locate the statement The com bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle's placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

8-12

Driving and Operating


combined weight of the driver, pas sengers, and cargo should never ex ceed the vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Example 2
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Ex ample 2 = 453kg (1,000lbs). B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150lbs) 5 = 340kg (750lbs). C. Available Cargo Weight = 113kg (250lbs).

Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Ex ample 3 = 453kg (1,000lbs). B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 91 kg (200 lbs) 5 = 453kg (1,000 lbs). C. Available Cargo Weight = 0kg (0 lbs). Refer to the vehicle's Tire and Load ing Information label for specific infor mation about the vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The

Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to the lower area of the cen ter pillar (B-Pillar) on the driver side of the vehicle. The label tells the gross weight capacity of the vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the

Driving and Operating


GVWR for the vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. If the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, it should be spread out. See Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit earlier in this section.

8-13

9 Warning
Things inside the vehicle can strike and injure people in a sud den stop or turn, or in a crash. Put things in the cargo area of the vehicle. In the cargo area, put them as far forward as pos sible. Try to spread the weight evenly. Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in the vehicle. Secure loose items in the vehi cle. Do not leave a seat folded down unless needed.

Starting and Operating


New Vehicle Break-In
Notice The vehicle does not need an elab orate break-in. But it will perform bet ter in the long run if you follow these guidelines: Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow, for the first 805km (500miles). Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid down shifting to brake or slow the vehi cle. Avoid making hard stops for the first 322km (200miles) or so. Dur ing this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean prema ture wear and earlier replacement.

9 Warning
Do not load the vehicle any heav ier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the max imum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle han dles. This could cause loss of con trol and a crash. Overloading can also shorten the life of the vehicle.

8-14

Driving and Operating


Notice Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer. The key must be fully extended to start the vehicle. LOCK (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is stopped, turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. Re tained Accessory Power (RAP) will remain active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 3 8-17 . This is the only position from which you can remove the key. This locks the steering wheel, ignition, and au tomatic transmission. Push in the ig nition switch as you turn the key to ward you. Do not turn the engine off when the vehicle is moving. This will cause a loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the air bags. In an emergency, if the vehicle must be shut off while driving: 1. Brake using a firm and steady pressure. Do not pump the brakes repeatedly. This may deplete power assist, requiring increased brake pedal force. 2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This can be done while the vehicle is moving. After shifting to neutral, firmly apply the brakes and steer the vehicle to a safe location. 3. Come to a complete stop. Shift to P(Park) with an automatic trans mission, or Neutral with a manual transmission. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. 4. Set the parking brake. See Parking Brake 3 8-26 .

Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake lin ings. Do not tow a trailer during breakin. See Trailer Towing 3 8-40 for the trailer towing capabilities of the vehicle and more information. Following break-in, engine speed and load can be gradually in creased.

Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has four different positions.

9 Warning
Turning off the vehicle while mov ing may cause loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags. While driving, only shut the vehicle off in an emergency.

Driving and Operating


5. If the vehicle must be shut off while driving, turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY. The ignition switch can bind in the LOCK/OFF position with your wheels turned off center. If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to left while turning the key to ACC/AC CESSORY. If this doesn't work, then the vehicle needs service. ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This po sition provides power to some of the electrical accessories. It unlocks the steering wheel and ignition. To move the key from ACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF, push in the key and then turn it to LOCK/OFF. ON (ON/RUN): The ignition switch stays in this position when the engine is running. This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories. To shift out of P(Park), turn the igni tion to ON/RUN and apply the brake pedal. The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the ACC/ACCES SORY or ON/RUN position with the engine off. You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is al lowed to drain for an extended period of time. START: This position starts the en gine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will return to ON/RUN for normal driving.

8-15

Starting the Gasoline Engine


Automatic Transmission
Move the shift lever to P(Park) or N (Neutral). The engine will not start in any other position. To restart the ve hicle when it is already moving, use N(Neutral) only. Notice Shifting into P(Park) with the vehicle moving could damage the transmis sion. Shift into P(Park) only when the vehicle is stopped.

not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the en gine and transmission gently to al low the oil to warm up and lubri cate all moving parts. Notice Holding the key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause the battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage the starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining the battery or damaging the starter. 2. If the engine does not start, wait about 15seconds and try again to start the engine by turning the ig nition to START. Wait about 15 seconds between each try. When the engine has run about 10seconds to warm up, the vehi cle is ready to be driven. Do not run the engine at high speed when it is cold. If the weather is below freezing (32F or 0C), let the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.

Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will slow down as the engine warms. Do

8-16

Driving and Operating


Automatic Transmission
Notice If the wait-to-start light stays on after starting the vehicle, the vehicle may not run properly. Have the vehicle serviced right away. 3. If the engine does not start after 15seconds of cranking, turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF. Wait one minute for the starter to cool, then try the same steps again. If you are trying to start the engine af ter you have run out of fuel, follow the steps in Running Out of Fuel 3 8-35 . When the engine is cold, let it run for a few minutes before you move the vehicle. This lets oil pressure build up. The engine will sound louder when it's cold. Notice If you are not in an idling vehicle and the engine overheats, you would not be there to see the overheated en gine indication. This could damage the vehicle. Do not let the engine run when you are not in the vehicle.

3. If the engine still will not start, or starts but then stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the en gine. Notice The engine is designed to work with the electronics in the vehicle. If elec trical parts or accessories are added, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you do not, the engine might not perform properly. Any re sulting damage would not be cov ered by the vehicle warranty.

Move the shift lever to P(Park) or N (Neutral). The engine will not start in any other position. To restart the ve hicle when it is already moving, use N(Neutral) only. Notice Shifting into P(Park) with the vehicle moving could damage the transmis sion. Shift into P(Park) only when the vehicle is stopped. 1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN. Observe the wait-to-start light. See Wait-to-Start Light (Diesel Only) 3 5-23 . This light may not come on if the engine is warm. 2. As soon as the wait-to-start light goes off, immediately turn the ig nition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The engine has a fast warm-up glow plug system. The wait-tostart light will illuminate for a much shorter time than most diesel en gines, due to the rapid heating of the glow plug system.

Starting the Diesel Engine


The diesel engine starts differently than a gasoline engine.

Driving and Operating


If the Diesel Engine Will Not Start
Be sure you have the right oil for the engine, and that you have changed the oil at the proper times. If you use the wrong oil, the engine may be harder to start. Be sure you are using the proper fuel for existing weather conditions. See Fuel for Diesel Engines 3 8-34 . If the engine starts, runs a short time, then stops, the vehicle needs service.

8-17

If you have run out of fuel, look at Running Out of Fuel 3 8-35 . See Fuel for Diesel Engines 3 8-34 . If the vehicle is not out of fuel, and the engine will not start, do this: Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN. Im mediately after the wait-to-start light goes off, turn the ignition key to START. If the light does not go off, wait a few seconds, then try starting the engine again. See your dealer as soon as you can for a starting system check. If the light comes on and then goes off and you know the battery is charged, but the engine still will not start, the vehicle needs service. If the light does not come on when the engine is cold, the vehicle needs service. If the battery does not have enough charge to start the engine, see Battery 3 9-21 .

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)


These vehicle accessories may be used for up to 10minutes after the ig nition key is turned to the LOCK/OFF position: Outside Mirror Power Windows Sunroof (if equipped) Radio The outside mirror, power windows, and sunroof will function until a door is opened. The radio will function until the driver door is opened. If no door is opened after the ignition key is turned to the LOCK/OFF posi tion, all accessories will be turned off after 10minutes.

9 Warning
Do not use gasoline or starting aids, such as ether, in the air in take. They could damage the en gine. There could also be a fire, which could cause serious per sonal injury.

8-18

Driving and Operating


3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. 4. Remove the key.

Shifting Into Park


9 Warning
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P(Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine run ning, the vehicle can move sud denly. You or others could be in jured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer, see Driving

Torque Lock

Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine Running 9 Warning


It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running. If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle must be in P(Park) and the parking brake set. Release the button and check that the shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park).

Characteristics and Towing Tips 3 8-37 .

Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the transmission into P(Park) is not done properly and then it is dif ficult to shift out of P(Park). To pre vent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P(Park). To find out how, see Shifting Into Park listed previously. If torque lock does occur, the vehicle may need to be pushed uphill by an other vehicle to relieve the parking pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P(Park).

Use this procedure to shift into P (Park): 1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake. See Parking Brake 3 8-26 for more information. 2. Hold the button on the shift lever and push the lever toward the front of the vehicle into P(Park).

Driving and Operating Shifting out of Park


This vehicle is equipped with an elec tronic shift lock release system. The shift lock release is designed to: Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P(Park) with the shift lever button fully released. Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P(Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and the brake pedal is applied. The shift lock release is always func tional except in the case of an un charged or low voltage (less than 9volt) battery. If the vehicle has an uncharged bat tery or a battery with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery. See Jump Starting 3 9-63 To shift out of P(Park): 1. Apply the brake pedal. 2. Press the shift lever button. 3. Move the shift lever to the desired position. If still unable to shift out of P(Park): 1. Fully release the shift lever button. 2. Hold the brake pedal down and press the shift lever button again. 3. Move the shift lever to the desired position. If the shift lever still cannot be moved from P(Park), see Shift Lock Manual Release.

8-19

Shift Lock Manual Release

7-Passenger Left-Hand Drive Shown, Right-Hand Drive Similar The vehicle may have a Shift Lock Manual Release system. If you can not shift out of P(Park) with the igni tion in ON/RUN and the brake pedal applied: 1. Turn the ignition off and remove the key. 2. Hold the brake pedal down.

3. Remove the mat from the bottom of the storage area in front of the shifter.

8-20

Driving and Operating

4. Press and hold the shift lock re lease button in the floor of the stor age area. 5. Shift to N(Neutral). 6. Reinstall the mat. 7. Start the engine and shift into the gear you want. 8. Have the vehicle repaired as soon as possible.

Engine Exhaust
9 Warning
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation (parking ga rages, tunnels, deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes). The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different. The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage. The vehicle exhaust system has been modified, damaged or im properly repaired.

Parking over Things That Burn


9 Warning
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehi cle and ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that can burn.

There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after market modifications that are not completely sealed. If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle: Drive it only with the windows completely down. Have the vehicle repaired imme diately. Never park the vehicle with the en gine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation.

Diesel Particulate Filter


The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is designed to reduce hydrocarbons (HC) and carbon monoxide (CO) emissions and to collect particulates from the engine exhaust to minimize discharge of soot to the atmosphere. The soot particles accumulate in the channels of the coated diesel filter and are burnt off at regular intervals,

Driving and Operating


through a process called regenera tion, to prevent filter clogging. See Diesel Particulate Filter Light 3 5-23 for more information. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will come on to indicate that there is a malfunction in the DPF. Notice Engine performance can be reduced when excess soot has accumulated in the DPF. If this happens, you should see your dealer immediately.

8-21

9 Warning
During DPF self cleaning or during extended idling in P(Park), the ex haust system and exhaust gases are very hot. Things that burn could touch hot exhaust parts un der the vehicle and ignite. You or others could be burned. Do not park, or idle for an extended period of time, near or over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that can burn. Keep the exhaust area clear of material that could ig nite or burn. See Parking over Things That Burn \3 8-20 for more information.

9 Warning
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dan gerous. Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust con tains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more in formation, see Engine Exhaust 3 8-20 .

Running the Vehicle While Parked


It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know.

8-22

Driving and Operating


9 Warning

Automatic Transmission
The shift lever is located on the con sole between the seats.

It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic trans mission shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P(Park). Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move. See Shifting Into Park 3 8-18. If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 3 8-37 .

There are several different positions for the automatic transmission. P(Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the best position to use when starting the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily.

9 Warning
It is dangerous to get out of the ve hicle if the shift lever is not fully in P(Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine run ning, the vehicle can move sud denly. You or others could be in jured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P(Park). See Shifting Into Park 3 8-18 . If you are pulling a trailer, see Driving

Characteristics and Towing Tips 3 8-37 .

Driving and Operating


Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic transmis sion shift lock control system. The regular brakes must be applied first and then the shift lever button pressed before you can shift from P (Park) when the ignition key is in ON/ RUN. If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into P(Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting out of Park 3 8-19 . R(Reverse): Use this gear to back up. Notice Shifting to R(Reverse) while the ve hicle is moving forward could dam age the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Shift to R(Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped. To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging the transmission, see If the Vehicle Is Stuck 3 8-9 . N(Neutral): In this position, the en gine does not connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use N(Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.

8-23

D(Drive): This position is for normal driving, and allows the transmission to shift into all forward gears. It pro vides the best fuel economy. Downshifting the transmission in slip pery road conditions could result in skidding. See Skidding under Loss of Control 3 8-5 . Notice Spinning the tires or holding the ve hicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

9 Warning
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the ve hicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed. Notice Shifting out of P(Park) or N(Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmis sion. The repairs would not be cov ered by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.

8-24

Driving and Operating


The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears appropriate for the vehicle speed: The transmission will not automati cally shift to the next higher gear without moving the shift lever. The transmission will not allow shifting to the next lower gear if the vehicle speed is too high. 1. Move the shift lever from D(Drive) into the manual gate. 2. With the vehicle stopped, move the shift lever forward to select 2 (Second). The vehicle will start from a stop position in 2(Second). 3. Once the vehicle is moving, select the desired drive gear or move the shift lever to the D(Drive) position.

Manual Mode
To use this feature, if equipped, do the following: 1. Move the shift lever from D(Drive) into the manual gate. 2. Push the shift lever forward to ward the plus (+) to upshift or rear ward toward the minus () to downshift. In manual shift mode all forward gears can be selected. While using the MSM feature the ve hicle will have operation similar to a manual transmission. You can use this for sport driving or when driving hilly roads to stay in gear longer or to downshift for more power or for en gine braking.

Manual Shift Mode (MSM) (Automatic Transmission)

2(Second) Gear Start Feature

When accelerating the vehicle from a stop in snowy and icy conditions, you may want to select 2(Second) gear. A higher gear, and light appli cation of the gas pedal, may allow you to gain more traction on slippery sur faces. With the Manual Shift Mode, the ve hicle can accelerate from a stop in 2 (Second).

Fuel Economy Mode


The vehicle may have a fuel economy mode. When engaged, fuel economy mode can improve the vehicle's fuel economy.

Pressing the eco button by the shift lever will engage fuel economy mode. When activated, the eco light in the instrument cluster will come on. See

Driving and Operating


Fuel Economy Light 3 5-25 . Pressing the button a second time will turn fuel economy mode off. When fuel economy mode is on: The transmission will upshift sooner, and downshift later. The torque converter will lockup sooner, and stay on longer. The gas pedal will be less sensitive. The vehicle's computers will more aggressively shut off fuel to the en gine under deceleration. Do not use fuel economy mode while towing.

8-25

Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive
Vehicles with this feature always send engine power to all four wheels. It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for road conditions. When using a compact spare tire on an AWD vehicle, the system automat ically detects the compact spare and disables AWD. To restore AWD op eration and prevent excessive wear on the system, replace the compact spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. See Compact Spare Tire 3 9-63 for more information.

Brakes
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an advanced elec tronic braking system that helps pre vent a braking skid. When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock 3 5-20 . If driving safely on a wet road and it becomes necessary to slam on the brakes and continue braking to avoid

Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

8-26

Driving and Operating


Using ABS
The vehicle has an Electric Parking Brake (EPB). The switch for the EPB is in the center console. The EPB can always be activated, even if the igni tion is OFF. To prevent draining the battery, avoid repeated cycles of the EPB system when the engine is not running. The system has a parking brake sta tus light and a parking brake warning light. See Electric Parking Brake Light 3 5-20 . In case of insufficient electrical power, the EPB cannot be applied or released. Before leaving the vehicle, check the parking brake status lamp to insure the parking brake is applied.

a sudden obstacle, a computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will sepa rately work the brakes at each wheel. ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as required, faster than any driver could. This can help the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard. As the brakes are applied, the com puter keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stop ping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.

Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let ABS work. You might hear the ABS pump or motor operating and feel the brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than even the very best braking.

Parking Brake
Seven Passenger

EPB Apply

The EPB can be applied any time the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is ap plied by momentarily lifting up on the EPB switch. Once fully applied, the parking brake status light will be on. While the brake is being applied, the status lamp will flash until full apply is reached. If the light does not come on, or remains flashing, you need to have

Driving and Operating


the vehicle serviced. Do not drive the vehicle if the parking brake status light is flashing. See your dealer. See Electric Parking Brake Light 3 5-20 for more information. If the EPB is applied while the vehicle is in motion, a chime will sound. The vehicle will decelerate as long as the switch is held in the up position. Re leasing the EPB switch during the de celeration will release the parking brake. If the switch is held in the up position until the vehicle comes to a stop, the EPB will remain applied. If the parking brake status light flashes continuously, the EPB is only partially applied or released, or there is a problem with the EPB. If this light flashes continuously, release the EPB, and attempt to apply it again. If this light continues to flash, do not drive the vehicle. See your dealer. If the parking brake warning light is on, the EPB has detected an error in another system and is operating with reduced functionality. To apply the EPB when this light is on, lift up on the EPB switch and hold it in the up posi tion. Full application of the parking brake by the EPB system may take a longer period of time than normal when this light is on. Continue to hold the switch until the parking brake sta tus light remains on. If the parking brake warning light is on, see your dealer. If the EPB fails to apply, the rear wheels should be blocked to prevent vehicle movement.

8-27

down position. EPB release may take a longer period of time than normal when this light is on. Continue to hold the switch until the parking brake sta tus light is off. If the light is on, see your dealer. Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off be fore driving.

EPB Release

To release the EPB, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, apply and hold the brake pedal, and push down momentarily on the EPB switch. If you attempt to release the EPB without the brake pedal applied, a chime will sound and the press brake pedal light will appear. The EPB is released when the parking brake status light is off. If the parking brake warning light is on, the EPB has detected an error in another system and is operating with reduced functionality. To release the EPB when this light is on, push down on the EPB switch and hold it in the

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release if the vehicle is running, placed into gear and an attempt is made to drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration when the EPB is applied, to preserve park ing brake lining life.

8-28

Driving and Operating

Brake Assist
This vehicle has a brake assist fea ture designed to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the stability system hy draulic brake control module to sup plement the power brake system un der conditions where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake con trol module increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal pul sation or pedal movement during this time is normal and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates. The brake assist feature will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.

Ride Control Systems


Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The vehicle has an Electronic Stabil ity Control (ESC) system which com bines antilock brake, traction, and stability control systems and helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving condi tions. ESC activates when the computer senses a discrepancy between the in tended path and the direction the ve hicle is actually traveling. ESC selec tively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle's brakes to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended path. When the vehicle is started and be gins to move, the system performs several diagnostic checks to insure there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt while it is work ing. This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle. This light on the instrument panel cluster will flash when ESC is both on and activated. If the system fails to turn on or acti vate, this light will be on solid. When the light is on solid, the system will not assist the driver in maintaining direc tional control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that a problem exists with the system. The ESC warning light will be on solid to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and requires service. If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle, see your dealer for service.

Driving and Operating


control can be re-engaged when road conditions allow. See Cruise Control 3 8-31 .

8-29

Traction Control System (TCS)


The ESC can be turned off or on by pressing and releasing g on the in strument panel.

The vehicle has a Traction Control System that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road con ditions. The system operates only if it senses that any of the drive wheels are spinning or beginning to lose trac tion. When this happens, TCS applies the brakes to limit wheel spin and also reduces engine power. The system may be heard or felt while it is work ing, but this is normal.

The vehicle will automatically decel erate to a low speed and remain there when DCS is turned on. Use only when descending steep grades while driving off-road. Do not use when driving on normal road sur faces. Some noise or vibration from the brake system may be heard or felt when DCS is active. This is normal.

The ESC Off light turns on solid when the system has been turned off. It is recommended to leave the sys tem on for normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow, and you want to rock the vehicle to attempt to free it. If cruise control is being used when ESC activates, the cruise control au tomatically disengages. The cruise

Active Rollover Protection

This function is part of the ESC sys tem. When the vehicle moves in an extremely unstable manner, this func tion helps the vehicle maintain normal stability.

Turn the system on by pressing the DCS button located on the instrument panel. The green DCS light comes on steady when the system is on.

Descent Control System (DCS)


The Descent Control System allows the vehicle to travel at a low speed without applying the brake.

8-30

Driving and Operating


Notice If the amber Descent Control Sys tem Light comes on and stays on, the system is malfunctioning. See your dealer for service. sorber to independently adjust the damping level to provide the optimum vehicle ride.

The green DCS light flashes on the instrument panel while driving at speeds below 50km/h (30mph) to show the system is operating. DCS will not activate at speeds above 50km/h (30mph), even if the button is pressed. Notice DCS is designed for driving down steep off-road hills. Unnecessary use of DCS can cause malfunctions in the brake system or ESC. To turn the system off, press the DCS button again and the DCS light turns off. Applying the brake or accelerator will also cause DCS to turn off. The amber DCS light flashes when the system is not ready due to high temperature through severe or repea ted braking. The light will turn off when the system cools. The amber DCS light comes on steady if there is a system malfunc tion.

Limited-Slip Differential
Vehicles with a limited-slip differential can give more traction on snow, mud, ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a standard differential most of the time, but when traction is low, this fea ture allows the drive wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle.

Automatic Level Control


This feature keeps the rear of the ve hicle level as the load changes. The system is automatic and no adjust ments are necessary.

Continuous Damping Control (CDC)


The Continuous Damping Control (CDC) feature provides superior ve hicle ride and handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions. The system is fully automatic and uses a computer controller to contin uously monitor vehicle speed, wheel to body position, lift/dive, and steering position of the vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock ab

Driving and Operating

8-31

Cruise Control
For vehicles with cruise control, a speed of about 40km/h (25mph) or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds below 40km/h (25mph). When the brakes are applied, or the cancel button pressed, the cruise control turns off. If the vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system, if equip ped, begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control automatically disen gages. The cruise control can be turned back on, when road conditions are safe again.

9 Warning
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.

J (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control on or off. RES/+ (Accelerate/Resume): Press to make the vehicle resume to a pre viously set speed or accelerate. SET/- (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed and activate cruise control or make the vehicle decelerate. Q (Cancel): Press to disengage the cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory. Setting Cruise Control If the cruise button is on when not in use, it could get bumped and go into cruise when not desired. Keep the cruise control switch off when cruise is not being used. 1. Press J to turn cruise control on. 2. Get up to the speed desired. 3. Press SET/- and release it. The cruise control light comes on in the instrument panel cluster to show that the cruise control is on. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

The cruise control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.

8-32

Driving and Operating


Use the accelerator pedal to get to a higher speed. Press SET/-, then release the button and the acceler ator pedal. Press and hold the RES/+ until the desired speed is reached, and then release it. To increase the vehicle speed in small amounts, briefly press RES/+ and then release it. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about 2 km/h (1.2mph) faster. The accelerate feature only works af ter the cruise control is turned on by pressing SET/-. Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control If the cruise control system is already activated: Press SET/- until the lower speed desired is reached, then release it. To decrease the vehicle speed in small amounts, briefly press SET/- . Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about 2km/h (1.2mph) slower. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the previously set cruise control speed. Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down. When the brakes are applied the cruise control is disengaged. Disengaging Cruise Control There are two ways to end cruise con trol: Step lightly on the brake pedal or press the clutch pedal, if you have a manual transmission. Press Q . Press J .

Resuming a Set Speed If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are ap plied, or Q is pressed, the cruise con trol is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory. Once the vehicle speed is about 40 km/h (25mph) or more, briefly press RES/+. The vehicle returns to the pre viously set speed and stays there. If RES/+ is held, the vehicle speed continues to increase until the button is released, the brake pedal is ap plied, or Q is pressed. Do not hold in the RES/+ button, unless you want the vehicle to go faster. Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control If the cruise control system is already activated:

Driving and Operating


Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set speed is erased from memory by pressing J or if the vehicle is turned off.

8-33

Object Detection Systems


Ultrasonic Parking Assist (UD7 - For Vehicles with 3 Sensors)
The parking assistance system aids the driver during backward movement of the vehicle by chiming if any object is sensed behind the vehicle. This system is turned on whenever the ignition switch is ON and the transmission is shifted to R(Reverse). The chime sounds once when shifting to R(Reverse). This indicates a nor mal condition. If there are several chimes when shifting to reverse, there is a malfunction with the system and the warning light can come on. If this happens, consult your dealer to repair the problem as soon as possi ble.

You can figure out the distance be tween your vehicle and obstacles us ing the chime. The closer the vehicle is to an object the faster the chime will sound. If the distance is less than 30 - 40 cm, the signal will be continuous.

8-34

Driving and Operating Fuel for Diesel Engines


Diesel engines must be operated only on commercially available diesel fuel meeting the specifications of DIN EN 590. Marine diesel fuel, fuel oils, die sel fuels, which are entirely or partially plant based such as rape seed oil or bio-diesel, Aquazole and similar die sel-water emulsions must not be used. The flow and filterability of die sel fuels are insufficient at low tem peratures, as a result of crystallized paraffins. Diesel fuels with improved low-temperature properties are there fore available on the market during the winter months. Make sure that you use winter fuel before the start of the cold weather season. Use of die sel fuels with manufacturer guaran teed winter properties eliminates the need for additives. 2. Turn drain plug, located on the left of the filter housing, counterclockwise using a suitable screw driver, to drain off the water. The filter is drained as soon as diesel fuel emerges from the port. 3. Retighten the drain plug by turn ing it clockwise. 4. With engine switched off, turn ig nition key to ON, wait approx. 5 seconds, and turn key to LOCK to perform priming operation. Per form this operation 3 times or more while the engine is switched off, to avoid air entering the fuel line. Check diesel fuel filter at shorter in tervals if the vehicle is subjected to extreme operating conditions such as high humidity (primarily in coastal areas), extremely high or low outside temperatures and substantially vary ing daytime and nighttime tempera tures. If there is water in the diesel fuel filter, a warning light illuminates in the instrument panel. See Water in Fuel Warning Light (Diesel Only) 3 5-25 . Drain the water immediately.

Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper mainte nance of this vehicle, keeps the en gine clean, and maintains optimum vehicle performance.

Fuel for Petrol Engines


Commercially available high-quality fuels are suitable. Fuel quality has a decisive influence on the power out put, driveability and life of the engine. The additives contained in the fuel play an important role in this regard. You should therefore use only highquality fuels containing additives. Pet rol with too low an octane number can cause pinging and resulting damage. Petrol with a higher octane number can always be used. A dispensing pump for leaded fuel cannot be inser ted in the fuel tank of a vehicle that must be operated on unleaded fuel only. Use of petrol with an octane rat ing of 95 will ensure economical driv ing.

Water in Fuel
Drain diesel fuel filter of residual wa ter at every engine oil change. 1. Place a container underneath the filter housing.

Driving and Operating Running Out of Fuel


Running out of diesel fuel requires pri ming after fuel is added. With engine switched off, turn ignition key to ON, wait approx. 5 seconds, and turn key to LOCK to perform pri ming operation. Perform this opera tion 3 times or more while the engine is switched off, to avoid air entering the fuel line.

8-35

Filling the Tank


9 Warning
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the in structions on the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when refuel ing. Do not smoke near fuel or when refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refu eling the vehicle. This is against the law in some places. Do not reenter the vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel. The tethered fuel cap is located be hind a hinged fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle. The fuel door can be unlocked by pressing the door un

lock button on the remote control or pressing the lock switch in the driver's door. To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released too soon, it will spring back to the right. While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door. When reinstalling the cap, turn it clockwise until it clicks, otherwise the Malfunction Indicator Lamp may turn on. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp 3 5-17 .

9 Warning
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

8-36

Driving and Operating


Notice If a new fuel cap is needed, be sure to get the right type of cap from your dealer. The wrong type of fuel cap might not fit properly, might cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light, and could damage the fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp 3 5-17 .

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Exterior Care 3 9-69. When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly instal led. This would allow fuel to evapo rate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp 3 5-17 .

Filling a Portable Fuel Container


9 Warning
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the con tainer can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others: Dispense fuel only into ap proved containers. Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, or on any sur face other than the ground. Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete. Do not smoke while pumping fuel. Do not use a cellular phone while pumping fuel.

9 Warning
If a fire starts while you are refuel ing, do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately.

Driving and Operating

8-37

Towing
General Towing Information
Only use towing equipment that has been designed for the vehicle. Con tact your dealer or trailering dealer for assistance with preparing the vehicle for towing a trailer. See the following trailer towing infor mation in this section: For information on driving while towing a trailer, see Driving Char acteristics and Towing Tips. For maximum vehicle and trailer weights, see Trailer Towing. For information on equipment to tow a trailer, see Towing Equip ment. For information on towing a disabled vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle 3 9-66 . For information on towing the vehicle behind another vehicle such as a motor home, see

Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips


9 Warning
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equip ment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work wellor even at all. The driver and passen gers could be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be dam aged; the resulting repairs would not be covered by the vehicle war ranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been fol lowed. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle. The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the proper trailer tow ing equipment. To identify the trailer ing capacity of the vehicle, see Trailer Towing 3 8-40 . Trailering changes handling, acceleration, braking, dura bility, and fuel economy. With the

added weight, the engine, transmis sion, wheel assemblies, and tires are forced to work harder and under greater loads. The trailer also adds wind resistance, increasing the pull ing requirements. For safe trailering, correctly use the proper trailering equipment. The following information has impor tant trailering tips and rules for your safety and that of your passengers. Read this section carefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points: There are many laws, including speed limit restrictions that apply to trailering. Check for legal require ments. Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1600 km (1,000miles) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle, or other parts could be damaged.

Recreational Vehicle Towing 3 9-66.

8-38

Driving and Operating


Driving with a Trailer Following Distance

During the first 800km (500miles) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 80km/h (50mph) and do not make starts at full throttle. This reduces wear on the vehicle. Vehicles with automatic transmis sions can tow in D (Drive) but M (ManualMode) is recommended. See Manual Mode 3 8-24 for more information. Use a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often. For vehicles with a manual transmis sion, it is better not to use the high est gear. Use the cruise control when towing. Turn off the fuel economy mode (ECO) when towing. Obey speed limit restrictions. Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers, or no more than 90km/h (55mph), to re duce wear on the vehicle.

Towing a trailer requires experience. Get familiar with handling and braking with the added trailer weight. The ve hicle is now longer and not as respon sive as the vehicle is by itself. Check all trailer hitch parts and at tachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, tires, and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. During the trip, check regularly to be sure that the load is secure, and the lamps and trailer brakes are working properly.

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer. Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle be fore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Towing with a Stability Control System

When towing, the sound of the stabil ity control system might be heard. The system is reacting to the vehicle movement caused by the trailer, which mainly occurs during cornering. This is normal when towing heavier trailers.

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

Driving and Operating


Making Turns
Notice Making very sharp turns while trai lering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. The ve hicle could be damaged. Avoid mak ing very sharp turns while trailering. When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so the trailer won't strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other ob jects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneu vers. Signal well in advance. nal when they are not. It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

8-39

Driving on Grades

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle is turning, chang ing lanes, or stopping. When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. For this reason you may think other drivers are seeing the sig

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so much that they would get hot and no longer work well. Vehicles with an automatic transmis sion can tow in D (Drive) but M (Man ualMode) is recommended. Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions. For vehicles with a manual transmis sion, it is better not to use the highest gear. When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower tem perature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while

parked, preferably on level ground, with the automatic transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes before turn ing the engine off. For vehicles with manual transmissions, let the engine run while parked, preferably on level ground, with the transmission out of gear and the parking brake applied, for a few minutes before turning the engine off. If the overheat warning comes on, see Engine Overheating 3 9-17 .

Parking on Hills 9 Warning


Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be danger ous. If something goes wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a flat surface.

8-40

Driving and Operating


Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you: Start the engine. Shift into a gear. Release the parking brake. 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

If parking the rig on a hill: 1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P(Park) yet for vehicles with an automatic transmission, or into gear for vehicles with a man ual transmission. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill. 2. Have someone place chocks un der the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the brake pedal un til the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P(Park) for vehicles with an automatic transmission or into gear for vehicles with a manual transmission. 5. Release the brake pedal.

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing

The cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating 3 9-17 .

Trailer Towing
Before pulling a trailer, there are three important considerations that have to do with weight: The weight of the trailer The weight of the trailer tongue The total weight on the vehicle's tires

Maintenance When Trailer Towing

The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer. See the Main tenance Schedule booklet for more information. Things that are espe cially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling sys tem, and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and dur ing the trip. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Driving and Operating


Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trai lering equipment. The weight of addi tional optional equipment, passen gers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maxi mum trailer weight.

8-41

Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the Certifi cation label or see Vehicle Load Limits 3 8-10 for more information. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR, in cluding the weight of the trailer tongue. If using a weight distributing hitch, make sure not to go over the rear axle limit before applying the weight distribution spring bars.

Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options. Vehicle 2.0L L4 Engine RPO LPN, Automatic Transmission, 5 Passenger 750 kg Without Trailer (1,653 Brake lbs) With Trailer Brake 2.4L L4 Engine RPO LE9, Automatic Transmission, 7 Passenger 1 700 kg (3,748 lbs) 4 015 kg (8,852 lbs) 4 015 kg (8,852 lbs) Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

Weight of the Trailer


How heavy can a trailer safely be? It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can de pend on any special equipment on the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See

Weight of the Trailer Tongue 3 8-42later in this section for more information.

8-42

Driving and Operating


Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR* 750 kg (1,653 lbs) AWD: 3 905 kg (8,609 lbs) FWD: 3 840 kg (8,466 lbs) AWD: 3 905 kg (8,609 lbs) FWD: 3 840 kg (8,466 lbs) Ask your dealer for our trailering in formation or advice.

Vehicle

Weight of the Trailer Tongue


The tongue load(A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be car rying that weight, too. See Vehicle Load Limits 3 8-10 for more informa tion about the vehicle's maximum load capacity.

Without Trailer Brake

With Trailer Brake

1,500 kg (3,307 lbs)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rat ing (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehi cle and trailer including any passen gers, cargo, equipment and conver sions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded.

If a weight-carrying hitch or a weightdistributing hitch is being used, the trailer tongue(A) should weigh 10-15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight(B). After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, sepa rately, to see if the weights are proper. If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer. Trailering may be limited by the vehi cle's ability to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the ve hicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Ve hicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR

Driving and Operating


(Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce the trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight. It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the vehicle and trailer.

8-43

Towing Equipment
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed. The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for hitches. Do not at tach rental hitches or other bumpertype hitches to it. Use only a framemounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper. Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle when the trailer hitch is installed? If there are, then be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is removed. If the holes are not sealed, dirt, water, and deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the ex haust can get into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust 3 8-20 . Installing the Hitch 1. Remove the hitch cover and store it a safe place.

Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires


Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the Certifi cation label or see Vehicle Load Limits 3 8-10 for more information. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR, in cluding the weight of the trailer tongue. If using a weight distributing hitch, make sure not to go over the rear axle limit before applying the weight distribution spring bars.

8-44

Driving and Operating


4. Push forward and down on the hitch (C) until the hitch is en gaged, and latches into place. The indicator on the hitch will turn green (B) and the pins on the hitch (D) will be seated in the retainer of the receiver (A).

2. Make sure the hitch is ready to be installed.

Insert the hitch locking key (D) into the hitch lock (C). Rotate the key down to the un lock position. The indicator on the hitch should be red (A). There is a gap between the knob and the hitch (B).

3. Insert the hitch (C) upward into the receiver (A) until the pins (B) on the hitch are in the retainer of the hitch receiver.

5. Rotate the locking key up to the lock the hitch into place and re move the hitch locking key.

Driving and Operating


Check that the hitch is correctly in stalled: The indicator on the hitch is green There is no gap between the pins on the hitch and the retainer on the receiver. The hitch is seated firmly in the re ceiver. The key is locked in the up position. Key is removed from the hitch. Removing the Hitch 2. Turn the key down to the unlock position. 3. Push in on the locking lever the hitch. 4. Rotate the lever forward 1/4 turn.

8-45

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between the ve hicle and the trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from con tacting the road if it becomes separa ted from the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

5. Lift up and pull outward to remove the hitch from the receiver. 6. Insert the hitch cover into the re ceiver housing.

A loaded trailer that weighs more than 450kg (1,000lbs) needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed, adjusted, and maintained properly. Because the vehicle has antilock brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's brake system. If you do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all.

Trailer Wiring Harness


1. Insert the hitch locking key into the hitch lock.

All of the electrical circuits required for the trailer lighting system can be ac cessed at the driver side rear lamp

8-46

Driving and Operating

connector. This connector is located under the carpet at the rear corner of the cargo compartment.

Conversions and AddOns


Add-On Electrical Equipment
When TSC is applying the brakes, the ESC indicator light flashes to notify the driver to reduce speed. See Notice Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equip ment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. Add-on equipment can drain the ve hicle's 12-volt battery, even if the ve hicle is not operating. The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 3 3-29 and Adding Equipment to the AirbagEquipped Vehicle 3 3-30 .

The trailer indicator light comes on when a trailer is connected to the ve hicle. It goes out again when the trailer is disconnected.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)


The vehicle has a Trailer Sway Con trol (TSC) feature as part of the Elec tronic Stability Control (ESC) system. If while towing, the system detects that the trailer is swaying, the vehi cle's brakes are applied without the driver pressing the brake pedal.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light 3 5-22 . If the trailer continues to sway, ESC will reduce engine torque to help slow the vehi cle. TSC will not function if ESC is turned off.

Vehicle Care

9-1

Vehicle Care
General Information
General Information ................. 9-2 Accessories and Modifications ......................... 9-2

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your Own Service Work ..................................... 9-3 Hood ......................................... 9-3 Engine Compartment Overview (2.0L RHD) ............ 9-4 Engine Compartment Overview (2.4L RHD) ............ 9-6 Engine Oil ................................. 9-7 Engine Oil Life System ........... 9-10 Automatic Transmission Fluid .................................... 9-11 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ........ 9-13 Engine Coolant (2.0L and 2.4L L4 Engines) ................. 9-14 Engine Overheating ............... 9-17 Power Steering Fluid .............. 9-18 Washer Fluid .......................... 9-19 Brakes .................................... 9-19 Brake Fluid ............................. 9-20 Battery .................................... 9-21

All-Wheel Drive ...................... 9-22 Rear Axle ............................... 9-22 Starter Switch Check .............. 9-22 Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Check .................................. 9-23 Ignition Transmission Lock Check .................................. 9-23 Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check .............. 9-23 Wiper Blade Replacement ..... 9-24

Electrical System

Electrical System Overload .... 9-31 Fuses and Circuit Breakers .... 9-31 Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................................... 9-32 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................................... 9-35

Wheels and Tires

Headlamp Aiming

Headlamp Aiming ................... 9-25

Bulb Replacement

Bulb Replacement .................. 9-27 Halogen Bulbs ........................ 9-27 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ...................... 9-27 Headlamps, Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ................................. 9-27 Fog Lamps ............................. 9-29 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps ................................. 9-30 License Plate Lamp ................ 9-30 Replacement Bulbs ................ 9-31

Tires ....................................... 9-39 Winter Tires ............................ 9-39 Tire Pressure .......................... 9-40 Recommended Cold Tire Inflation ............................... 9-42 Tire Pressure Monitor System ................................ 9-43 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation ............................ 9-44 Tire Inspection ........................ 9-44 Tire Rotation (Long Wheel Base) .................................. 9-45 When It Is Time for New Tires .................................... 9-45 Buying New Tires ................... 9-46 Different Size Tires and Wheels ................................ 9-46 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............................... 9-47 Wheel Replacement ............... 9-47 Tire Chains ............................. 9-48

9-2

Vehicle Care

If a Tire Goes Flat .................. 9-48 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ........................................ 9-50 Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ................... 9-56 Tire Changing ......................... 9-56 Compact Spare Tire ............... 9-63

General Information
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer. You will receive genuine parts and trained and supported service people.

Jump Starting Towing

Jump Starting ......................... 9-63

Accessories and Modifications


Adding non-dealer accessories or making modifications to the vehicle can affect vehicle performance and safety, including such things as air bags, braking, stability, ride and han dling, emissions systems, aerody namics, durability, and electronic sys tems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. These accessories or modifications could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Damage to vehicle components re sulting from modifications or the in stallation or use of non-company cer tified parts, including control module or software modifications, is not cov ered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts.

Accessories from your dealer are de signed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle. Your dealer can accessorize the ve hicle using genuine accessories. When you go to your dealer and ask for accessories, you will know that company-trained and supported serv ice technicians will perform the work using genuine accessories.

Towing the Vehicle ................. 9-66 Recreational Vehicle Towing ................................ 9-66

Appearance Care

Exterior Care .......................... 9-69 Interior Care ........................... 9-72 Floor Mats .............................. 9-74

Vehicle Care

9-3

Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own Service Work
9 Warning
You can be injured and the vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it. Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts, and tools before attempting any ve hicle maintenance task. Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and other fasteners. Met ric and English fasteners can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners are used, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt. If doing some of your own service work, use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can.

This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Airbag System Check 3 3-30 . Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed.

Hood
To open the hood, do the following: 2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up on the secondary hood release lever. 3. Lift the hood. Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.

1. Pull the handle with this symbol on it. It is located under the instru ment panel on the driver side of the vehicle.

9-4

Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview (2.0L RHD)

Vehicle Care
2.0L L4 Engine 7Pass. A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 3 9-13. B. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes 3 9-19. C. Clutch Fluid Reservoir. D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil 3 9-7 . E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil 3 9-7 . F. Auxiliary Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine

9-5

Compartment Fuse Block 3 9-32 . G. Fuel Filter. H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid3 9-18 .

I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Cap. See Engine Coolant (2.0L and 2.4L L4 Engines) 3 9-14 . J. Engine Compartment Fuse Block 3 9-32 . K. Windshield Washer Fluid Reser voir. See Washer Fluid 3 9-19 . L. Battery 3 9-21 .

9-6

Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview (2.4L RHD)

Vehicle Care
2.4L L4 Engine A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 3 9-13 . B. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes 3 9-19 . C. Clutch Fluid Reservoir. D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil 3 9-7. E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil 3 9-7. F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid 3 9-18. G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Cap. See Engine Coolant (2.0L and 2.4L L4 Engines) 3 9-14 . H. Engine Compartment Fuse Block 3 9-32. I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reser voir. See Washer Fluid 3 9-19. J. Battery 3 9-21 .

9-7

Engine Oil
To ensure proper engine perform ance and long life, careful attention must be paid to engine oil. Following these simple, but important steps will help protect your investment: Always use engine oil approved to the proper specification and of the proper viscosity grade. See Se lecting the Right Engine Oil in this section. Check the engine oil level regularly and maintain the proper oil level. See Checking Engine Oil and When to Add Engine Oil in this section. Change the engine oil at the appro priate time. See Engine Oil Life System 3 9-10 . Always dispose of engine oil prop erly. See What to Do with Used Oil in this section.

dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See

Engine Compartment Overview (2.0L RHD) 3 9-4 Engine Compartment Overview (2.4L RHD) 3 9-6 for the lo cation of the engine oil dipstick. Obtaining an accurate oil level read ing is essential: 1. If the engine has been running re cently, turn off the engine and al low several minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. Check ing the oil level too soon after en gine shutoff will not provide an ac curate oil level reading. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Re move it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the vehicle must be on level ground. The engine oil

If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommen ded oil and then recheck the level. See Selecting the Right Engine Oil in this section for an explanation of

9-8

Vehicle Care
mark on the container. This certifica tion mark indicates that the oil has been approved to the dexos specifi cation. Use of Substitute Engine Oils if dexos1 is unavailable: If engine oil of the required quality is not available, you may use substitute engine oil meeting dexos2, or engine oil display ing the API Starburst symbol, or an ACEA C3 oil, all of the appropriate viscosity grade. Specification (Diesel Engines) Use and ask for engine oils with the dexos certification mark. Oils meeting the requirements of the vehicle should have the dexos certification mark on the container. This certifica tion mark indicates that the oil has been approved to the dexos specifi cation.

what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications 3 11-2 . Notice Do not add too much oil. If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper mark that shows the proper operating range, the en gine could be damaged. See Engine Compartment Overview (2.0L RHD) 3 9-4 Engine Compartment Overview (2.4L RHD) 3 9-6 for the location of the engine oil fill cap. Add enough oil to put the level some where in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when through.

This vehicle was filled at the factory with dexos1-approved engine oil. Notice Use only engine oil that is approved to the dexos specification or an equivalent engine oil of the appro priate viscosity grade. Engine oils approved to the dexos specification will show the dexos symbol on the container. Failure to use the recom mended engine oil or equivalent can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are unsure whether the oil is approved to the dexos specification, ask your service provider.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oil depends on both the proper oil specification and viscosity grade: Specification (Petrol Engines) Use and ask for engine oils with the dexos certification mark. Oils meet ing the requirements of the vehicle should have the dexos certification

This vehicle was filled at the factory with dexos2-approved engine oil.

Vehicle Care
Notice Use only engine oil that is approved to the dexos specification or an equivalent engine oil of the appro priate viscosity grade. Engine oils approved to the dexos specification will show the dexos symbol on the container. Failure to use the recom mended engine oil or equivalent can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are unsure whether the oil is approved to the dexos specification, ask your service provider. Use of Substitute Engine Oils if dexos2 is unavailable: If engine oil of the required quality is not available, you may use substitute engine oil that meets ACEA C3 of the appropriate viscosity grade. Viscosity Grade SAE5W-30 is the best viscosity grade for the vehicle. Do not use other vis cosity oils such as SAE10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.

9-9

oil of this viscosity grade will provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures. When selecting an oil of the appropriate vis cosity grade, be sure to always select an oil that meets the required specifi cation. See Specification earlier in this section for more information. SAE5W-30 is best for the vehicle. SAE 0W-30, 0W-40, or 5W-40 can also be used. The numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thick ness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE20W-50. The SAE viscosity rating defines the ability of an oil to flow. When cold, oil is more viscous than when hot. Multi grade oil is indicated by two figures. The first figure, followed by a W, indi cates low temperature viscosity and the second figure the high tempera ture viscosity.

Cold Temperature Operation: In an area of extreme cold, where the tem perature falls below29C (20F), an SAE0W-30 oil should be used. An

Engine Oil Additives/Engine Oil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. The use of engine oil additives could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

9-10

Vehicle Care Engine Oil Life System


When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the en gine oil and filter. This is based on a combination of factors which in clude engine revolutions, engine tem perature, and miles driven. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life sys tem to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed. When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it indi cates that an oil change is necessary. A change engine oil light displays. Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 1000km (600mi). It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might indicate that an oil change is not nec essary for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and, at this time, the sys tem must be reset. Your dealer has trained service people who will per form this work and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly over the course of an oil drain interval and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset acciden tally, the oil must be changed at 5 000km (3,000mi) since the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.

Engine oil system flushes are not rec ommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certain ele ments that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used en gine oil. See the manufacturer's warn ings about the use and disposal of oil products. Used oil can be a threat to the envi ronment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the fil ter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash or pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.

How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System

Reset the system whenever the en gine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next engine oil change. To reset the system on gasoline en gine vehicles: 1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the engine off. 2. Fully press and release the accel erator pedal three times within five seconds. If the change engine oil light does not appear, the system is reset.

Vehicle Care
To reset the system on diesel engine vehicles: 1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the engine off. 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal for two seconds or more. 3. Fully release the accelerator pedal for two seconds or more. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 a total of three times. If the change engine oil light does not appear, the system is reset. If the change engine oil light comes back on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system has not re set. Repeat the procedure. to use the transmission fluid listed in

9-11

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 3 10-5 .

How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealer service depart ment. If adding it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or there could be a false reading on the dip stick. Notice Too much or too little fluid can dam age the transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if checking the transmission fluid.

Automatic Transmission Fluid


When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid
A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed. Change the fluid and filter at the in tervals listed in Scheduled Maintenance 3 10-2 , and be sure

Wait at least 30minutes before check ing the transmission fluid level if you have been driving: When outside temperatures are above 32C (90F). At high speed for quite a while. In heavy trafficespecially in hot weather. While pulling a trailer. To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating tem perature, which is 82C to 93C (180F to 200F). Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 24km (15miles) when outside temperatures are above 10C (50F). If it is colder than 10C (50F), drive the vehicle in 3(Third) until the engine temperature gauge moves and then remains steady for 10minutes. A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off, but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 10C (50F) or more. If it is colder than 10C

9-12

Vehicle Care

(50F), the engine might have to idle longer. Should the fluid level be low during this cold check, check the fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot gives a more accurate read ing of the fluid level. Checking the Fluid Level To prepare the vehicle: 1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running. 2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in P(Park). 3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in P (Park). 4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more. Then, without shutting off the engine: 1. Open the hood. See Hood 3 9-3.

2. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 3. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds, and pull it back out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area, for a cold check or in the HOT area for a hot check. Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an accurate reading. 5. If the fluid level is in the accepta ble range, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.

How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid

Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 3 10-5 to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use.

Vehicle Care
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only as a refer ence. If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5L). Do not overfill. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid, earlier in this section. When the correct fluid level is ob tained, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.

9-13

When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

2. Locate the air filter housing in the engine compartment. See Engine

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the scheduled maintenance intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 83000km (50,000mi) interval. See Schedule Maintenance in Serv ice and Maintenance for more infor mation. If driving in dusty/dirty condi tions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

Compartment Overview (2.0L RHD) 3 9-4Engine Compartment Overview (2.4L RHD )3 9-6

How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter


Compartment Overview (2.4L RHD )3 9-6 for the location of the en gine air cleaner/filter.
See Engine Compartment Overview (2.0L RHD) 3 9-4Engine

To inspect the air cleaner/filter, re move the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains cov ered with dirt, a new filter is required. Never use compressed air to clean the filter. To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter: 1. Open the hood. See Hood Hood 3 9-3 .

3. Loosen the clamp securing the air cleaner/filter cover to the duct as sembly. 4. Remove the screw securing the cover of the air cleaner/filter hous ing. 5. Pull straight up on cover, while holding the cover remove the air filter.

9-14

Vehicle Care Engine Coolant (2.0L and 2.4L L4 Engines)


The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine cool ant. This coolant is designed to re main in the vehicle for 5years or 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever oc curs first. The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating 3 9-17 .

6. Inspect or replace the air filter. See Maintenance Replacement Parts 3 10-6 for the correct fil ter part number. 7. Reverse steps 1 to 4 to install cover.

What to Use 9 Warning


Adding only plain water or some other liquid to the cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water and other liquids, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. The coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mix ture, the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEXCOOL coolant. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinka ble water and DEX-COOL coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else needs to be added. This mixture:

9 Warning
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when work ing on the engine and do not drive with the air cleaner/filter off. Notice If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily get into the engine, which could damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.

Vehicle Care
Gives freezing protection down to 37C (34F), outside tempera ture. Gives boiling protection up to 129C (265F), engine tempera ture. Protects against rust and corrosion. Will not damage aluminum parts. Helps keep the proper engine tem perature. Notice If an improper coolant mixture is used, the engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the en gine, radiator, heater core, and other parts. Notice If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle's cooling sys tem, the vehicle could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system. See

9-15

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 3 10-5 for more infor mation.

mark pointed to, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEXCOOL coolant at the coolant recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done. If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as follows:

How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank 9 Warning


You can be burned if you spill cool ant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. Notice This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure. Failure to follow this pro cedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely damaged.

Never dispose of engine coolant by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, or into sewers, streams, or bodies of water. Have the coolant changed by an authorized service center, familiar with legal require ments regarding used coolant dis posal. This will help protect the envi ronment and your health.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a level sur face when checking the coolant level. Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the

9-16

Vehicle Care
9 Warning
You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. 1. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise. If a hiss is heard, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 2. Then keep turning the cap and re move it. 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to above the MIN (B) mark on the front of the coolant surge tank. 4. With the coolant surge tank cap off, start the engine and let it run until the upper radiator hose starts getting hot. Watch out for the en gine cooling fans. By this time, the coolant level in side the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches above the MIN (B) mark on the front of the coolant surge tank. 5. Then replace the cap. Be sure the cap is hand-tight and fully seated. Notice If the pressure cap is not tightly in stalled, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly se cured.

An electric engine cooling fan un der the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

9 Warning
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are un der pressure, and if you turn the surge tank pressure capeven a littlethey can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

A. MAX B. MIN

Vehicle Care
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank. See Notice Engine damage from running the en gine without coolant is not covered by the warranty.

9-17

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 3 10-5 .

Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating. There is a coolant temperature gauge and a warning light on the instrument panel cluster that indicate an over heated engine condition. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 3 5-14 for more information. You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning appears, but in stead get service help right away. If you do decide to lift the hood , make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface. Then check to see if the engine cool ing fans are running. If the engine is overheating, the fan(s) should be run ning. If they are not, do not continue to run the engine and have the vehicle serviced.

If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment


1. Turn the engine off. 2. Move away from vehicle without opening hood. 3. Allow engine to cool.

If No Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment


If an engine overheat warning is dis played but no steam can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle: Climbing a long hill on a hot day. Stopping after high-speed driving. Idling for long periods in traffic. Towing a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam: 1. Turn the air conditioning off. 2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as necessary. 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N(Neutral) while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to P(Park) or N(Neutral) and let the engine idle. If the temperature overheat gauge is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle slow for about 10 mi nutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the warning does not come back on, con tinue to drive normally. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.

9-18

Vehicle Care
To check the power steering fluid, do the following: 1. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/ OFF and let the engine compart ment cool down. 2. Locate power steering reservoir under the hood. Refer toEngine 4. If fluid is needed, turn the cap counterclockwise and pull it straight up. 5. Fill power steering fluid reservoir to between the MAX and MIN lines. 6. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. 7. When the engine is hot, the level should be at the hot MAX level. When the engine is cold, the fluid level should be between MIN and MAX on the reservoir.

If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while parked. If the warning is still dis played, turn off the engine until it cools down.

Power Steering Fluid


When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power steering fluid is used in all ve hicles. It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you sus pect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspec ted and repaired.

Compartment Overview (2.0L RHD)3 9-4 Engine Compartment Overview (2.4L RHD)3 9-6.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 3 10-5 . Always use the proper fluid.

How to Check Power Steering Fluid

Check the level after the vehicle has been driven for at least twenty mi nutes so the fluid is warm.

3. Check that the fluid level is be tween the MIN and MAX lines on the power steering reservoir.

Vehicle Care Washer Fluid


What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufactur er's instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.

9-19

Overview (2.0L RHD) 3 9-4 Engine Compartment Overview (2.4L RHD)3 9-6 for reservoir location.
Notice When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer's in structions for adding water. Do not mix water with ready-touse washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage the washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water does not clean as well as washer fluid. Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expan sion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is com pletely full. Do not use engine coolant (anti freeze) in the windshield washer. It can damage the windshield washer system and paint.

Brakes
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indica tors that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly.

Adding Washer Fluid

9 Warning
The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to a crash. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced. Notice Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly ap plied. This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.

Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Engine Compartment

9-20

Vehicle Care
Replacing Brake System Parts
The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 4 brake fluid. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down: The brake fluid level goes down be cause of normal brake lining wear. When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes back up. A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic sys tem fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well. Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed. Add or re move brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hy draulic system.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are nec essary to help prevent brake pulsa tion. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper se quence to torque specifications in

Capacities and Specifications 3 11-2 . Brake linings should always be re placed as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service might be required.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts. When parts of the braking sys tem are replaced, be sure to get new, approved replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might not work properly. For example, installing disc brake pads that are wrong for the ve hicle, can change the balance be tween the front and rear brakes for the worse. The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed.

Brake Fluid

Vehicle Care
9 Warning
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and the vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning Light 3 5-19 . What to Add Use only new DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed container. It is recommen ded that the brake hydraulic system be flushed and refilled with new DOT 4 fluid at a regular maintenance serv ice every two years. See Scheduled Maintenance 3 10-2 and

9-21

9 Warning
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic system, the brakes might not work well. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. Notice Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in the brake hy draulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. If brake fluid is spilled on the vehi cle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehi cle. If you do, wash it off immedi ately.

Battery
Refer to the replacement number shown on the original battery label when a new battery is needed. See

Engine Compartment Overview (2.0L RHD)3 9-4 Engine Compartment Overview (2.4L RHD)3 9-6 for battery location.

Vehicle Storage 9 Warning


Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not careful. See Jump Starting 3 9-63 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt. Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative() cable from the battery to keep the battery from running down. Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative() cable from the bat tery or use a battery trickle charger.

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 3 10-5 . Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap be fore removing it. This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

9-22

Vehicle Care
How to Check Lubricant

All-Wheel Drive
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case fluid unless a leak is suspected or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and re paired.

Starter Switch Check


9 Warning
When you are doing this inspec tion, the vehicle could move sud denly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake 3 8-26 . Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 3. For automatic transmission vehi cles, try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in P(Park) or N(Neutral). If the ve hicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer for service. For manual transmission vehi cles, put the shift lever in Neutral, push the clutch pedal down half way, and try to start the engine.

Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and re paired. To get an accurate reading, the vehi cle should be on a level surface. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Scheduled Maintenance 3 10-2 .

Vehicle Care
The vehicle should start only when the clutch pedal is pushed down all the way to the floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal is not pushed all the way down, contact your dealer for service. 3. With the engine off, turn the igni tion on, but do not start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of P(Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer for service.

9-23

Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check


9 Warning
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. Park on a fairly steep hill, with the ve hicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the park ing brake. To check the parking brake's hold ing ability: With the engine running and the transmission in N(Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this un til the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.

Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Check


9 Warning
When you are doing this inspec tion, the vehicle could move sud denly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake 3 8-26. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.

Ignition Transmission Lock Check


While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever posi tion. The ignition should turn to LOCK/ OFF only when the shift lever is in P(Park). The ignition key should come out only in LOCK/OFF. Contact your dealer if service is re quired.

9-24

Vehicle Care
5. Reverse steps 1 through 3 for wiper blade replacement.

To check the P(Park) mechanism's holding ability: With the engine run ning, shift to P(Park). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake. Contact your dealer if service is re quired.

Wiper Blade Replacement


Windshield wiper blades should be in spected for wear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance 3 10-2 for more information. Replacement blades come in differ ent types and are removed in different ways. For proper type and length, see 2. Lift up on plastic latch in the mid dle of the wiper blade where the wiper arm attaches. 3. With the latch open, pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield far enough to release it from the Jhooked end of the wiper arm. 4. Remove the wiper blade. Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield. Any dam age that occurs would not be cov ered by the vehicle warranty. Do not allow the wiper blade to touch the windshield.

Maintenance Replacement Parts 3 10-6 . To replace the windshield wiper blade: 1. Pull the windshield wiper assem bly away from the windshield.

Vehicle Care

9-25

Headlamp Aiming
The headlamp aiming system has been preset at the factory. If the vehicle is damaged in an acci dent, the aim of the headlamps may be affected and adjustment may be necessary. It is recommended that a dealer ad just the headlamps. To re-aim the headlamps yourself, use the following procedure. The vehicle should be properly pre pared as follows: The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are 7.6m (25ft) from a light colored wall. The vehicle must have all four tires on a level surface which is level all the way to the wall. The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other flat surface. The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.

The vehicle should be fully assem bled and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming is being performed. The vehicle should be normally loa ded with a full tank of fuel and one person or 75kg (160lbs) sitting on the driver's seat. Tires should be properly inflated. Headlamp aiming is done with the ve hicle's low-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be cor rectly aimed if the low-beam head lamps are aimed properly. To adjust the vertical aim, do the fol lowing: 1. Open the hood. See Hood Hood 3 9-3 for more information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam headlamp. 3. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim dot on the lowbeam headlamp. Record the dis tance.

9-26

Vehicle Care

4. At the wall measure from the ground upward(A) to the recorded distance from Step3 and mark it. 5. Draw or tape a horizontal line(B) on the wall the width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in Step4. Notice Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up which may cause dam age to the headlamp. 6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the head lamp not being adjusted. This al lows only the beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on the flat surface.

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aim ing screws, which are under the hood near each headlamp as sembly. 8. Turn the vertical aiming screw un til the headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle of the beam.

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is positioned at the bot tom edge of the horizontal tape line. The lamp on the left(A) shows the correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the right(B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim. 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite headlamp.

Vehicle Care

9-27

Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs 3 9-31 . For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer.

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting


9 Warning
The low beam high intensity dis charge lighting system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to service any of the system compo nents, you could be seriously in jured. Have your dealer or a quali fied technician service them. The vehicle may have HID head lamps. After an HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was originally. This is normal.

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps

Halogen Bulbs
9 Warning
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.

A. B. C. D.

Turn Signal Lamp Low-Beam Headlamp High-Beam Headlamp Parking Lamp

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps

If the vehicle is equipped with HID lighting, see your dealer for headlamp replacement. See High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting 3 9-27 for more information.

9-28

Vehicle Care
Parking Lamps

Halogen Headlamps

To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Open the hood. See Hood 3 9-3 .

To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Open the hood. See Hood 3 9-3. 2. Remove the headlamp assembly. 3. Remove the dust cover from the back of the headlamp housing by turning counterclockwise a quar ter turn.

2. Remove the three screws (A) re taining the headlamp assembly. 3. Pull the headlamp assembly straight forward releasing the re taining studs from the grommets. 4. Remove the dust cover from the back of the headlamp housing by turning counterclockwise a quar ter turn.

5. Disconnect the electrical connec tor. 6. Remove the bulb from the head lamp assembly by releasing the spring clamp. 7. Install the new bulb in the socket. 8. Install the bulb and attach the spring clamp. Reconnect the elec trical connector 9. Install the dust cover in the back of the headlamp housing by turn ing clockwise a quarter turn. 10. Reinstall the headlamp assembly.

4. Turn the bulb socket (C) counter clockwise to remove it from the headlamp assembly (A).

Vehicle Care
5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of the socket (C). 6. Push the new bulb into the socket (C) and reinstall the socket into the headlamp assembly (A) by turning it clockwise. 4. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of the socket (C). 5. Push the new bulb into the socket (C) and reinstall the socket into the headlamp assembly (A) by turning it clockwise.

9-29

Front Turn Signal Lamps

To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Open the hood. See Hood 3 9-3. 2. Remove the headlamp assembly.

Fog Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Open the hood. See Hood 3 9-3 . 4. Remove the connector retaining tab (A). 5. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the bulb (C) by pressing the connector release (B) and pulling straight back. 6. Remove the old bulb from the from the fog lamp assembly by squeezing the bulb release tabs and pulling straight out. 7. Push the new bulb into the bulb assembly until it locks into place.

3. Turn the bulb socket (C) counter clockwise to remove it from the headlamp assembly (A).

2. Remove the three screws (A) re taining the headlamp assembly. 3. Pull the headlamp assembly straight forward releasing the re taining studs from the grommets.

9-30

Vehicle Care
3. Pull the lamp assembly straight rearward releasing the retaining studs from the grommets. 4. Turn the bulb socket counter clockwise to remove it. 5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it from the bulb socket. 6. Install the new bulb into the bulb socket. 7. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall. 8. Install the lamp assembly into the vehicle. Make sure to align the re taining studs to the grommets. 9. Install two screws to secure lamp assembly in place on the vehicle.

8. Install the wiring harness connec tor to the bulb. Be sure the con nector release (B) locks into place. 9. Install the connector retaining tab (A).

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps


To replace one of these lamps: 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate 3 2-6 .

License Plate Lamp


The licence plate lamps for this vehi cle are on the trunk lid. To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate 3 2-6 . 2. Remove the two screws retaining the taillamp assembly in place.

2. Remove two screws and the lamp cover. 3. Turn the bulb socket counter clockwise to remove from lamp assembly . 4. Pull the bulb straight out of the bulb socket. 5. Push the replacement bulb straight into the bulb socket and turn the bulb socket clockwise to install into lamp assembly. 6. Install the bulb socket back into the lamp housing. 7. Install the lamp cover using two screws.

Vehicle Care Replacement Bulbs


Exterior Lamp Back-Up Lamp Front Turn Signal Lamp Front Parking Lamp Headlamp (Base) High Beam Bulb Number W16W PY21W W21/5W H7

9-31

Electrical System
Electrical System Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit breakers to protect against an electri cal system overload. When the current electrical load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the current load returns to normal or the problem is fixed. This greatly reduces the chance of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical problems. Fuses and circuit breakers protect power devices in the vehicle. Replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. If there is a problem on the road and a fuse needs to be replaced, the same amperage fuse can be borrowed. Choose some feature of the vehicle that is not needed to use and replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some ca ses to remain off. Have the headlamp wiring checked right away if the lamps go on and off or remain off.

Windshield Wipers

Headlamp(Base) Low H7 Beam License Plate Lamp Rear Fog Lamp Rear Turn Signal Lamp Side Identification Marker Lamp (If Equipped) W5W P21W

Rear Stop/Tail Lamp W21/5W W21W W5W

If the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice, the windshield wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart. Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow or ice may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield be fore using the windshield wipers. If the overload is caused by an elec trical problem and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and Circuit Breakers


The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your dealer.

9-32

Vehicle Care
Notice Spilling liquid on any electrical com ponent on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component.

breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electri cal problems. To check a fuse, look at the silver-col ored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure to replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. Fuses of the same amperage can be temporarily borrowed from another fuse location, if a fuse goes out. Re place the fuse as soon as possible. To identify and check fuses, circuit breakers, and relays, see Engine Compartment Fuse Block 3 9-32 and Instrument Panel Fuse Block 3 9-35 .

Engine Compartment Fuse Block


The engine compartment fuse block is located on the right side of the en gine compartment, near the battery.

Vehicle Care

9-33

9-34

Vehicle Care
Fuses ECM PWR TRN ENG SNSR EPB FAN1 FAN3 FRT FOG FRT WPR FUEL/VAC HDLP WASHER HI BEAM LH Usage Engine Control Module/Powertrain Miscellaneous Engine Sensors Electric Parking Brake Cooling Fan 1 Cooling Fan 3 Front Fog Lamps Front Wiper Motor Fuel Pump/Vacuum Pump Headlamp Washer High-Beam Headlamp (Left) Fuses HTD WASH/ MIR IGN COIL A IGN COIL B LO BEAM LH LO BEAM RH PRK LP LH PRK LP RH Usage Heated Washer Fluid/Heated Mirrors Ignition Coil A Ignition Coil B Low-Beam Headlamp (Left) Low-Beam Headlamp (Right) Parking Lamps (Left) Parking Lamps (Right)

The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown. Fuses ABS Usage Antilock Brake System Heater, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning System Instrument Panel Fuse Block Main Feed 1 Instrument Panel Fuse Block Main Feed 2 Instrument Panel Fuse Block Main Feed 3 Body Control Module Engine Control Module

A/C

BATT1

BATT2

BATT3 BCM ECM

Parking Lamps PRK LP RH* (Right) (Europe Park Lamps) PWM FAN REAR DEFOG Pulse Width Modulation Fan Rear Window Defogger

High-Beam HI BEAM RH Headlamp (Right) HORN Horn

Vehicle Care
Fuses REAR WPR SPARE STRTR TCM TRLR PRK LP Relays FAN1 RLY FAN2 RLY FAN3 RLY Usage Rear Wiper Motor Not Used Starter Transmission Control Module Trailer Parking Lamps Usage Cooling Fan 1 Cooling Fan 2 Cooling Fan 3 Fuel Pump/ Vacuum Pump Relay Relays HI BEAM RLY LO BEAM RLY Usage High Beam Headlamps Low Beam Headlamps

9-35

STOP LAMP Stop Lamps

PWR/TRN RLY Powertrain REAR DEFOG Rear Window RLY Defogger STOP LAMP RLY STRTR RLY Stop Lamps Starter Pull the latch of the fuse box cover straight back to access the fuses.

WPR CNTRL Wiper Control RLY WPR SPD RLY Wiper Speed

FRT FOG RLY Front Fog Lamps FUEL/VAC PUMP RLY

Instrument Panel Fuse Block


The instrument panel fuse block is lo cated on the passenger side of the lower console.

HDLP WSHR Headlamp Washer RLY

9-36

Vehicle Care

Vehicle Care
The vehicle may not have all of the fuses, relays, and features shown. Fuses AMP APO JACK (CONSOLE) APO JACK (REAR CARGO) AWD/VENT BCM (CTSY) BCM (DIMMER) Usage Amplifier Auxiliary Power Outlet Jack Auxiliary Power Outlet Jack Rear Cargo All-Wheel Drive/ Ventilation Body Control Module (Courtesy) Body Control Module (Dimmer) Fuses Usage Fuses FRT WSR FSCM Usage Front Washer

9-37

Body Control BCM (STOP) Module (Stop Lamp) BCM (TRN SIG) Body Control Module (Turn Signal)

F/DOOR LOCK Fuel Door Lock Fuel System Control Module

Body Control BCM (VBATT) Module (Battery Voltage) CIGAR CIM CLSTR DRL DR/LCK DRVR PWR SEAT DRV/PWR WNDW Cigarette Communications Integration Module Instrument Cluster Daytime Running Lamps Driver Door Lock Driver Power Seat Driver Power Window

Fuel System FSCM/VENT Control Module, SOL Vent Solenoid HEATING MAT Heating Mat Switch SW HTD SEAT PWR Heated Seat Power

Body Control BCM (INT Module (Interior LIGHT) TRLR Light), Trailer Fog FOG Lamps BCM (PRK/ TRN) Body Control Module (Parking/ Turn Signal)

Heating, Ventilation, and Air HVAC BLWR Conditioning Blower IPC Instrument Panel Cluster

Inside Rearview ISRVM/RCM Mirror/Remote Compass Module

9-38
Fuses

Vehicle Care
Usage Key Capture Lift Gate Logistic Mode Outside Rear View Mirror Passenger Power Window Fuses SDM (IGN 1) SPARE S/ROOF Usage Safety Diagnosis Module (Ignition 1) Spare Sunroof Speed Sensitive Power Steering Relays ACC/RAP RLY CIGAR APO JACK RLY RUN/CRNK RLY RUN RLY Usage Accessory/Run Accessory Power Cigarette and Auxiliary Power Outlet Run/Crank Run

KEY CAPTURE L/GATE LOGISTIC MODE OSRVM PASS PWR WNDW

S/ROOF BATT Sunroof Battery SSPS

PWR DIODE Power Diode PWR MODING Power Moding RADIO RR FOG RUN 2 RUN/CRNK SDM (BATT) Radio Rear Defogger Power Battery Key On Run Run Crank Safety Diagnosis Module (Battery)

Steering Wheel STR/WHL SW Switch TRLR TRLR BATT XBCM Trailer Trailer Battery Export Body Control Module XM Satellite Radio (If Equipped)/Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning/Data Link Connection

XM/HVAC/ DLC

Vehicle Care

9-39

Wheels and Tires


Tires
Factory-fitted tires are matched to this vehicle, offering the most effective combination of ride comfort, tread life and performance.

9 Warning
Poorly maintained and improp erly used tires are dangerous. Overloading the tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. There could be a blowout and a serious crash. See Vehicle Load Limits 3 8-10 . Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting crash could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when the tires are cold. Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden impact such as when hitting a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pres sure. Worn or old tires can cause a crash. If the tread is badly worn, replace them.

Replace any tires that have been damaged by impacts with potholes, curbs, etc. Improperly repaired tires can cause a crash. Only the dealer or an authorized tire service center should repair, replace, dismount, and mount the tires. Do not spin the tires in excess of 55 km/h (35 mph) on slippery surfaces such as snow, mud, ice, etc. Excessive spinning may cause the tires to explode. Driving over sharp objects can dam age the tires and wheels. If some ob jects are unavoidable, drive over them slowly and at a right angle, if possible. When parking, avoid making contact with the curb.

Winter Tires
Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on snow or ice covered roads is expected. All

9-40

Vehicle Care
Winter tires with the same speed rat ing as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If winter tires with a lower speed rating are chosen, never exceed the tire's max imum speed capability. Maintaining tires at the pressure specified in this manual will ensure the most effective combination of driv ing comfort, safety and performance. Incorrect tire inflation pressure will: Increase tire wear. Impair vehicle handling and safe operation. Affect ride comfort. Reduce fuel economy. If the tire pressures are too low, tires can overheat and suffer internal dam age, tread separation, and even a blowout at high speeds. Even if you later adjust the inflation pressure of the tires, previous driving with low pressure may have damaged the tires.

season tires provide good overall per formance on most surfaces but they may not offer the traction you would like or the same level of performance as winter tires on snow or ice covered roads. Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter tires, there may be decreased dry road traction, increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After changing to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking. See your dealer for details regarding winter tire availability and proper tire selection. Using incorrect winter tires may adversely affect Stability System Performance. Also, see Buying New Tires 3 9-46 . If using snow tires: Use them on all four wheels. Never exceed the maximum speed specified by the tire manufacturer. Always use the tire pressure speci fied by the tire manufacturer.

Tire Pressure
Notice Neither tire underinflation nor over inflation is good. Underinflated tires, or tires that do not have enough air, can result in: Tire overloading and overheating which could lead to a blowout. Premature or irregular wear. Poor handling. Reduced fuel economy. Overinflated tires, or tires that have too much air, can result in: Unusual wear. Poor handling. Rough ride. Needless damage from road haz ards.

When to Check

The tire pressure should be checked each time you fill the fuel tank or at least once a month using a tire pres sure gauge.

Vehicle Care
Check the inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Warm tires will produce an inaccurate reading. Tires can be come warm after driving more than 1.6 km (1 mile) and stay warm for up to three hours after stopping.

9-41

How to Check

Use an accurate tire pressure gauge to check the pressure of the tires when they are cold. Securely re tighten the valve caps after checking the tire inflation pressure.

9-42

Vehicle Care

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation


Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Tire Size Less than four occupants 215/70R16 235/60R17 235/55R18 155/90R16 (Temporary) 30psi (210kPa) 30psi (210kPa) 30psi (210kPa) 60psi Front More than five occupants with towing a trailer 33psi (230kPa) 33psi (230kPa) 33psi (230kPa) 60psi Less than four occupants 30psi (210kPa) 30psi (210kPa) 30psi (210kPa) 60psi Rear More than five occupants with towing a trailer 35psi (240kPa) 35psi (240kPa) 35psi (240kPa) 60psi

Vehicle Care Tire Pressure Monitor System


Notice Modifications made to the Tire Pres sure Monitor System (TPMS) by anyone other than an authorized service facility may void authoriza tion to use the system. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio and sensor tech nology to check tire pressure levels. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle's tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. Each tire, including the spare (if pro vided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the ve hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your ve hicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance, and it is the driver's responsi bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumina tion of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not oper

9-43

ating properly. The TPMS malfunc tion indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one mi nute and then remain continuously il luminated. This sequence will con tinue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu minated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, includ ing the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi cle that prevent the TPMS from func tioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after re placing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re placement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 3 9-44 for additional information.

9-44

Vehicle Care
Once the ignition is on, the TPMS sys tem is operational and will continu ously monitor the tire pressure at speeds of approximately 40 km/h and above. The TPMS automatically detects if the vehicle is being driven with a load of up to three persons or a full load. The TPMS does not replace manual checks with a tire gauge. Check the tire pressure at least every 14 days and prior to any long trip. The tires, including the spare, should be checked when cold. To display the current tire pressure select Tires from the board computer menu. A warning message is shown on the information display if one or more of the tires has pressure differences. In some versions the message will dis play in abbreviated form. See Notice Tire sealant materials are not all the same. A non-approved tire sealant could damage the TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty. Al ways use only the GM-approved tire sealant available through your dealer or included in the vehicle. Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM approved liquid tire sealant. Us ing non-approved tire sealants could damage the TPMS sensors. See Tire

Tire Pressure Monitor Operation


This vehicle may have a Tire Pres sure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS continually checks the pres sure and speed of all four tires while driving. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel as sembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle's tires and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. Once a minute, the pressure of each tire is sent to a control unit for com parison. If the system detects one or more pressure differences, a mes sage appears on the information dis play. The current tire pressure can be shown in the information display if the vehicle has a graphical information display or color information display and trip computer. All tires must have pressure sensors and be filled to the prescribed pres sure for the system to operate prop erly.

Sealant and Compressor Kit 3 9-50 for information regarding the inflator kit materials and instructions.

Tire Inspection
Regularly inspect the vehicle's tires, including the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, for signs of wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New Tires 3 9-45 for more information.

Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators 3 5-10 for additional infor mation.

Vehicle Care
Always remove the tires if any of the following statements are true: You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire's rubber. The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. The tire has a bump, bulge, or split. The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that cannot be re paired well because of the size or location of the damage. Check the wheels for damage. Tire defects including those above can cause loss of control of the vehi cle, resulting in a possible collision. If the tires or wheels are damaged or show abnormal wear see your dealer. To prolong the life of the tires and avoid uneven treadwear:

9-45

When It Is Time for New Tires


Factors such as maintenance, tem peratures, driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions affect the wear rate of the tires.

Tire Rotation (Long Wheel Base)


Normally, the front tires wear faster than the rear tires.

1. Rotate the tires using the rotation pattern shown if the front tires show greater wear than the rear tires. 2. Maintain the correct tire pressure. 3. Check tightening of the lug nuts/ bolts. See Tire Changing 3 9-56 . Lightly coat the center of the wheel hub with wheel bearing grease after a wheel change or tire rotation to pre vent corrosion or rust build-up. Do not get grease on the flat wheel mounting surface or on the wheel nuts or bolts.

Treadwear indicators are one way to tell when it is time for new tires. Tread wear indicators appear when the tires have only 1.6mm (1/16in) or less of tread remaining. See Tire Inspection 3 9-44 and Tire Rotation (Long Wheel Base) 3 9-45 for more information. The rubber in tires ages over time. This also applies for the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, even if it is never

9-46

Vehicle Care Buying New Tires


This vehicle was delivered with radial tires. We recommend using radials of the same size, design, tread wear, temperature and speed rating when replacing them.

used. Multiple conditions including temperatures, loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance affect how fast aging takes place. Tires will typically need to be replaced due to wear before they may need to be replaced due to age. Consult the tire manufacturer for more informa tion on when tires should be replaced.

Different Size Tires and Wheels


If wheels or tires are installed that are a different size than the original equipment wheels and tires, vehicle performance, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, sta bility, and resistance to rollover may be affected. If the vehicle has elec tronic systems such as antilock brakes, rollover airbags, traction con trol, and electronic stability control, the performance of these systems can also be affected.

9 Warning
Tires could explode during im proper service. Attempting to mount or dismount a tire could cause injury or death. Only your dealer or authorized tire service center should mount or dismount the tires.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normally mounted on a parked vehicle. Park a vehicle that will be stored for at least a month in a cool, dry, clean area away from direct sunlight to slow ag ing. This area should be free of grease, gasoline, or other substances that can deteriorate rubber. Parking for an extended period can cause flat spots on the tires that may result in vibrations while driving. When storing a vehicle for at least a month, remove the tires or raise the vehicle to reduce the weight from the tires.

9 Warning
Mixing tires of different sizes, brands, or types may cause loss of control of the vehicle, resulting in a crash or other vehicle damage. Use the correct size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.

Vehicle Care
9 Warning
If different sized wheels are used, there may not be an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. This increa ses the chance of a crash and se rious injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for the vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician. See Buying New Tires 3 9-46 and Accessories and Modifications 3 9-2 for additional information.

9-47

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance


The tires and wheels were aligned and balanced at the factory to provide the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis. However, check the alignment if there is unusual tire wear or if the vehicle is pulling to one side or the other. If the vehicle vibrates when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diame ter, width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors with new GM original equipment parts.

9 Warning
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of the ve hicle. Tires can lose air, and cause loss of control, causing a crash. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for re placement.

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum wheels can be repaired. See your dealer if any of these conditions exist. Your dealer will know the kind of wheel that is needed.

9-48

Vehicle Care
Follow the chain manufacturer's in structions. Only use tire chains on 215/70R16 size front tires. Do not use chains on the other tire sizes. Apply winter tires on vehicles with 235/55R18 size tires. Re-tighten the chains after driving about 1 km (.5 miles). SAE class S-type chains are proper type for this vehicle. Always drive slowly when you are using tire chains. If you hear the chains contacting the vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the ac celerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction as used in a skid. Stop pressing the ac celerator pedal and steer to straighten the vehicle. It may be very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.

Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis. See If a Tire Goes Flat 3 9-48 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels 9 Warning


Replacing a wheel with a used one is dangerous. How it has been used or how far it has been driven may be unknown. It could fail sud denly and cause a crash. When replacing wheels, use a new GM original equipment wheel.

If a Tire Goes Flat


It is unusual for a tire to blow out, es pecially if the tires are maintained properly. See Tires 3 9-39 . If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if there is ever a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:

Tire Chains
Remove any wheel coverings, if the vehicle has them, before fitting chains to the vehicle to avoid scratching them.

Vehicle Care
9 Warning
Driving on a flat tire will cause per manent damage to the tire. Re-in flating a tire after it has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat may cause a blowout and a se rious crash. Never attempt to reinflate a tire that has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat. Have your dealer or an au thorized tire service center repair or replace the flat tire as soon as possible.

9-49

9 Warning
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire. If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place, well off the road, if pos sible. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers 3 6-3 .

9 Warning
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall causing injury or death. Find a level place to change the tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Put an automatic transmission in P(Park) or a manual trans mission in 1(First) or R(Re verse). 3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised. 4. Do not allow passengers to re main in the vehicle. 5. Place wheel blocks on both sides of the tire at the opposite corner of the tire being changed. This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jacking equipment to change a spare tire

9-50

Vehicle Care Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit


9 Warning
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dan gerous. Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust con tains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see Engine Exhaust 3 8-20 .

safely, follow the instructions below. Then see Tire Changing 3 9-56 . To use the tire sealant and compressor kit, see Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 3 9-50 . When the vehicle has a flat tire(B), use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks(A).

9 Warning
Storing the tire sealant and com pressor kit or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store the tire sealant and com pressor kit in its original location. If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit, there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment, and on some vehicles there may not be a place to store a tire. The tire sealant and compressor can be used to temporarily seal punctures up to 6 mm ( in) in the tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate an under inflated tire. If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire is too severely damaged for the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective. Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor kit instructions.

A. Wheel Block B. Flat Tire The following information explains how to repair or change a tire.

9 Warning
Overinflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture and you or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit instructions and in flate the tire to its recommended pressure. Do not exceed the rec ommended pressure.

Vehicle Care
The kit includes: Selector Switch On/Off Button (Orange) Tire Sealant Canister Air Only Hose (Black Hose/White Tip) G. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear Hose/Or ange Tip) H. Power Plug C. D. E. F.

9-51

Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a Punctured Tire

Tire Sealant

A. Pressure Gauge B. Pressure Deflation Button (White)

Read and follow the safe handling in structions on the label adhered to the sealant canister. Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are available at your local dealer. See Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister following. There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After usage, the sealant can ister and sealant/air hose assembly must be replaced. See Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister following.

9-52

Vehicle Care
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (G) onto the tire valve stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight. 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the accessory power outlet in the ve hicle. Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets. See Power Outlets 3 5-9 . If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not use the ciga rette lighter. If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the cigarette lighter. Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window. 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor. 9. Press the on/off (D) button to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit on. The compressor will inject sealant and air into the tire. The pressure gauge (A) will ini tially show a high pressure while the compressor pushes the seal ant into the tire. Once the sealant is completely dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only. 10. Inflate the tire to the recommen ded inflation pressure using the pressure gauge (A). The recom mended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading In formation label. See Tire Pressure 3 9-40 . The pressure gauge (A) may read higher than the actual tire pres sure while the compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure reading. The compressor may be turned on/off

When using the tire sealant and com pressor kit during cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment for five minutes. This will help to in flate the tire faster. If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers 3 6-3 . See If a Tire Goes Flat 3 9-48 for other important safety warnings. Do not remove any objects that have penetrated the tire. 1. Remove the tire sealant and com pressor kit from its storage loca tion. See Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 3 9-56 . 2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G) and the power plug (H). 3. Place the kit on the ground. Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it. 4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counter clockwise.

8. Turn the selector switch(C) coun terclockwise to the Sealant + Air position.

Vehicle Care
until the correct pressure is reached. Notice If the recommended pressure can not be reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle should not be driven farther. The tire is too se verely damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve. 11. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off. The tire is not sealed and will con tinue to leak air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is distrib uted in the tire, therefore, Steps 12 through 18 must be done im mediately after Step 11. Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as it could be warm after usage. 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. 13. Turn the sealant/air hose (G) counterclockwise to remove it from the tire valve stem. 14. Replace the tire valve stem cap. 15. Replace the sealant/air hose (G), and the power plug (H) back in their original location.

9-53

16. If the flat tire was able to inflate to the recommended inflation pres sure, remove the maximum speed label from the sealant canister (E) and place it in a highly visible lo cation. Do not exceed the speed on this label until the damaged tire is re paired or replaced. 17. Return the equipment to its origi nal storage location in the vehicle. 18. Immediately drive the vehicle 8 km (5 miles) to distribute the sealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure. Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit with out Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured). If the tire pressure has fallen more than 68kPa (10 psi) below the rec ommended inflation pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire. If the tire pressure has not drop ped more than 68kPa (10 psi) from the recommended inflation pressure, inflate the tire to the rec ommended inflation pressure. 20. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire or vehicle. 21. Dispose of the used sealant can ister (E) and sealant/air hose (G) assembly at a local dealer or in accordance with local regulations and practices. 22. Replace it with a new canister available from your dealer.

9-54

Vehicle Care
3. Place the kit on the ground. Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it. 4. Remove the tire valve stem cap by turning it counterclockwise. 5. Attach the air only hose (F) onto the tire valve stem and turn it clockwise until tight. 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the accessory power outlet in the ve hicle. Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets. See Power Outlets 3 5-9 . If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not use the ciga rette lighter. If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the cigarette lighter. Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window. 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor.

23. After temporarily sealing a tire us ing the tire sealant and compres sor kit, take the vehicle to an au thorized dealer within a 161 km (100 miles) of driving to have the tire repaired or replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured)

To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only and not sealant: If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers 3 6-3 . See If a Tire Goes Flat 3 9-48for other important safety warnings. 1. Remove the tire sealant and com pressor kit from its storage loca tion. See Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 3 9-56 2. Unwrap the air only hose (F) and the power plug (H).

Vehicle Care
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate reading. The compres sor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure is reached. If you inflate the tire higher than the recommended pressure you can adjust the excess pressure by pressing the pressure deflation button (D) until the proper pres sure reading is reached. This op tion is only functional when using the air only hose (F). 11. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off. Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as it could be warm after usage. 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the air only hose (F) from the tire valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace the tire valve stem cap.

9-55

14. Replace the air only hose (F) and the power plug (H) back in its orig inal location. 15. Place the equipment in the origi nal storage location in the vehicle.

8. Turn the selector switch (C) clock wise to the Air Only position. 9. Press the on/off (D) button to turn the compressor on. The compressor will inflate the tire with air only. 10. Inflate the tire to the recommen ded inflation pressure using the pressure gauge (A). The recom mended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading In formation label. See Tire Pressure 3 9-40 . The pressure gauge (A) may read higher than the actual tire pres sure while the compressor is on.

The tire sealant and compressor kit has an accessory adapter located in a compartment on the bottom of its housing that may be used to inflate air mattresses, balls, etc.

Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister


To remove the sealant canister: 1. Unwrap both hoses.

9-56

Vehicle Care Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit


To access the tire sealant and com pressor kit: 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate 3 2-6 . 2. Lift the cover.

Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

2. Slide the canister away from the compressor housing. 3. Unscrew the hose connected to the canister. 4. Replace with a new canister which is available from your dealer. 5. Attach the hose to the canister and tighten. 6. Slide the new canister into place. Make sure it sits in the compres sor housing socket. 7. Replace both hoses to their origi nal location.

7Passenger Vehicle
3. Remove the tire sealant and com pressor kit. To store the tire sealant and compres sor kit, reverse the steps.

Vehicle Care
In some models, jack handle type is applied to the vehicle. To remove the spare tire:

9-57

9 Warning
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger com partment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. The jack and tools are located in the luggage compartment below the rear bumper. To remove the jack and tools: 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Lift the floor cover to the locate the wing bolt. 3. Turn the wing bolt counterclock wise to remove it from the jack. 4. Remove the jack and tool bag. 5. Remove the straps holding the tool bag. 6. Remove the tools from the bag. 1. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to re move the hole cover above the rear bumper. 2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen the bolt to lower the spare tire. 3. Unhook the cable on the tire car rier located below the rear bumper. 4. Remove the spare tire. See Compact Spare Tire 3 9-63 . Stow the jack and tools securely so they do not rattle while the car is mov ing.

9-58

Vehicle Care

How to use Jack for change the tire after installation Side Skirt LH/ RH

Take off CAP in the location you want to change the tire as shown.

Instruction : Take off the CAP 1. Use screw driver push on Rivet 1 time for unlocked and then take off Rivet 2 pcs. as shown.

2. Pull CAP out in the direction as shown. After take off CAP, then place the jack under the jacking point for change the tire. After take off CAP, then place the jack under the jacking point for change the tire. Install the CAP after removed the jack from jacking point Instruction : Installation 1. Push CAP into locked position as shown. 2. Install Rivet 2 pcs. to CAP and then use screw driver push on Rivet 1 time for locked CAP with Side skirt LH/RH as shown.

Vehicle Care
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before pro ceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat 3 9-48. Call a garage or motoring service for assistance if it is not safe to jack the vehicle or change the tire safely. 2. Use the wheel wrench or screw driver to remove the wheel cover if there is one. 3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Do not remove any of the nuts until the wheel is off the ground. 4. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack bolt head and rotate the wheel wrench clockwise to lift the head a little.

9-59

the body. Do not place the jack under a body panel. The lower body panel has an arrow to aid in locating the jacking location. 6. Put the compact spare tire near you.

9 Warning
Raising the vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can dam age the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.

5. There are notches under the doors at the front and rear of the vehicle. Position the jack vertically at the front or rear jacking notch closest to the wheel being changed. Make sure all of the jack lift head is touching the jacking flange under

9-60

Vehicle Care
9 Warning
Raising the vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can dam age the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. Notice Make sure that the jack lift head is in the correct position or you may dam age your vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. 8. Remove all the wheel nuts. 9. Remove the flat tire.

7. Turn the wheel wrench or jack handle clockwise until the lifting head fits firmly into the appropri ate notch and the tire is off the ground about 2.5 cm (1 in). Do not raise the vehicle more than is necessary to change the tire.

9 Warning
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.

9 Warning
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the ve hicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is suppor ted only by a jack.

10. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel.

Vehicle Care
11. Install the spare tire.

9-61

9 Warning
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel could fall off, causing a crash.

9 Warning
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing. Follow the torque specification supplied by the after market manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts. See

9 Warning
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to re move all rust or dirt. 12. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface. 13. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.

Capacities and Specifications 3 11-2 for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications.

14. Turn the wheel wrench or jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.

Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See

Capacities and Specifications 3 11-2 for the wheel nut torque specification.

9-62

Vehicle Care
Instruction : Take off the CAP 1. Use screw driver push on Rivet 1 time for unlocked and then take off Rivet 2 pcs. as shown. 2. Pull CAP out in the direction as shown. After take off CAP, then place the jack under the jacking point for change the tire. After take off CAP, then place the jack under the jacking point for change the tire. Install the CAP after removed the jack from jacking point Instruction : Installation 1. Push CAP into locked position as shown. 2. Install Rivet 2 pcs. to CAP and then use screw driver push on Rivet 1 time for locked CAP with Side skirt LH/RH as shown.

Storing a Flat Tire and Tools 9 Warning


Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger com partment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. 1. Hang the tire carrier on the sup port rod and tighten the bolt in the hole above the rear bumper to raise the tire carrier. See

15. Tighten the wheel nuts in a criss cross sequence, as shown. See

Capacities and Specifications 3 11-2 . 16. Install the wheel cover if there is one. 17. Lower the jack all the way and re move it from under the vehicle. 18. Tighten the bolts firmly with the wheel wrench or jack handle.

How to use Jack for change the tire after installation Side Skirt LH/ RH

Take off CAP in the location you want to change the tire as shown.

Capacities and Specifications 3 11-2 . 2. Hook the cable and reinstall the hole cover in its original position. 3. Secure the jack and tools in their original location. 4. Secure the flat tire in the luggage compartment. Do not store the flat tire below the rear bumper where the spare tire was located.

Vehicle Care
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as pos sible. Notice When the compact spare is instal led, do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails which can dam age the tire, wheel, and other parts of the vehicle. Do not use the temporary spare on other vehicles. Do not mix the temporary spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire and its wheel together. Notice Tire chains will not fit the compact spare. Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the compact spare.

9-63

Jump Starting
For more information about the vehi cle battery, see Battery 3 9-21 . If the vehicle battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

Compact Spare Tire


9 Warning
Driving with more than one com pact spare tire at a time could re sult in loss of braking and han dling. This could lead to a crash and you or others could be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at a time. The compact spare tire was fully in flated when the vehicle was new, but it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. See Vehicle Load Limits 3 8-10 for the correct inflation pressure. Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) when driving with a spare tire. The spare tire is for temporary emer gency use only. Replace it with a reg ular tire as soon as possible.

9 Warning
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because: They contain acid that can burn you. They contain gas that can ex plode or ignite. They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you do not follow these steps ex actly, some or all of these things can hurt you.

9-64

Vehicle Care
To avoid the possibility of the ve hicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles in volved in the jump start proce dure. Put automatic transmissions in P(Park), and manual transmis sions in neutral before setting the parking brake. Notice If the radio or other accessories are left on during the jump starting pro cedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle. 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehi cles. Unplug unnecessary acces sories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will avoid sparks, helping save both batteries and the radio. 4. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insula tion. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could also be damaged. Do not connect positive(+) to neg ative() or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts. Do not con nect the negative() cable to the negative() terminal on the dead

Notice Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the war ranty. Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage the vehicle. 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a neg ative ground system. Notice Only use a vehicle that has a 12-volt system with a negative ground for jump starting. If the other vehicle does not have a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touch ing each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you do not want. You would not be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.

Vehicle Care
battery because this can cause sparks.

9-65

9 Warning
Using an open flame near a bat tery can cause battery gas to ex plode. People have been hurt do ing this, and some have been blin ded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not need to add wa ter to the battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could be present. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help imme diately.

9 Warning
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running. 5. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the positive(+) terminal of the battery providing the jump start. This is identified by a positive(+) sign on the battery case or terminal. 6. Do not let the other end of the jumper cable touch metal. Con nect the other end of this same jumper cable to the positive(+) terminal of the discharged battery. 7. Connect the first end of the other jumper cable to the negative() terminal of the battery providing the jump start. This is identified by a negative() sign on the battery case or terminal. 8. Connect the other end of the sec ond jumper cable to ground on the other vehicle, such as a steel bracket bolted to the engine block.

9 Warning
An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

9-66

Vehicle Care
1. Carefully disconnect the ground connection(). Begin with the ve hicle with the discharged battery. Leave the discharged vehicle run ning. 2. Disconnect the negative() cable from the vehicle with the good bat tery. 3. Disconnect the positive(+) cable from both batteries. Store the jumper cables with the spare tire. 4. Operate the discharged vehicle for approximately 20 minutes. This will allow the charging sys tem to recharge your battery. 5. If this discharge condition reoc curs, see your dealer.

9. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. 10. Press the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter to disarm your security system, if equipped. 11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs serv ice. Notice If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, elec trical shorting may occur and dam age the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle war ranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct or der, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal. Disconnecting Jumper Cables Once the previously discharged vehi cle is running:

Towing
Towing the Vehicle
Notice To avoid damage, the disabled ve hicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground. Care must be taken with vehicles that have low ground clearance and/or special equipment. Always flatbed on a car carrier. Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed. To tow the vehicle behind another ve hicle for recreational purposes, such as behind a motor home, see Rec reational Vehicle Towing in this sec tion.

Recreational Vehicle Towing


Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another ve hicle such as behind a motor home. The two most common types of rec reational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.

Vehicle Care
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly. Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing: What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's recom mendations. What is the distance that will be travelled? Some vehicles have re strictions on how far and how long they can tow. Is the proper towing equipment go ing to be used? See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommen dations. Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed.

9-67

Dinghy Towing

Front-wheel-drive and all-wheel-drive vehicles may be dinghy towed from the front. These vehicles can also be towed by placing them on a platform trailer with all four wheels off of the ground. For other towing options, see Dolly Towing following in this sec tion. For vehicles being dinghy towed, the vehicle should be run at the beginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop for about five minutes. This will en sure proper lubrication of transmis sion components.

To tow the vehicle from the front with all four wheels on the ground: 1. Position the vehicle that will be towed. 2. Shift an automatic transmission to P(Park) or a manual transmission into 1(First) and set the parking brake. 3. Secure the vehicle to the towing vehicle 4. Turn the ignition key to ACC/AC CESSORY to unlock the steering wheel. 5. Shift an automatic transmission to N (Neutral) or a manual transmis sion to Neutral. 6. Turn off all accessories. 7. To prevent the battery from drain ing while the vehicle is being towed, remove the 2 amp IGN SW fuse from the instrument panel fuse block and store it in a safe lo cation. See Instrument Panel Fuse Block 3 9-35 . 8. Release the parking brake.

9-68

Vehicle Care
Notice Too much or too little fluid can dam age the transmission. Be sure that the transmission fluid is at the proper level before towing with all four wheels on the ground. Notice Do not tow a vehicle with the front drive wheels on the ground if one of the front tires is a compact spare tire. Towing with two different tire sizes on the front of the vehicle can cause severe damage to the transmission.

Notice If the vehicle is towed without per forming each of the steps listed un der Dinghy Towing, the automatic transmission could be damaged. Be sure to follow all steps of the dinghy towing procedure prior to and after towing the vehicle. Notice If 105km/h (65mph) is exceeded while towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never exceed 105km/h (65mph) while towing the vehicle. Once the destination has been reached: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Shift an automatic transmission to P (Park) or a manual transmission into 1 (First). 3. Reinstall the 2 amp IGN SW fuse to the instrument panel fuse block. 4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/ OFF and remove the key from the ignition.

Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

All-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with two wheels on the ground. To properly tow these vehicles, they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off of the ground or dinghy towed from the front.

To tow the vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground, do the following: 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. 2. Shift an automatic transmission to P (Park) or a manual transmission into 1 (First). 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing.

Vehicle Care
5. Remove the key from the ignition. 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. 7. Release the parking brake.

9-69

Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle's finish, wash it often and out of direct sunlight. Notice Do not use petroleum based, acidic, or abrasive cleaning agents as they can damage the vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic parts. If damage oc curs, it would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Approved clean ing products can be obtained from your dealer. Follow all manufacturer directions regarding correct product usage, necessary safety precau tions, and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product. Notice Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the sur face of the vehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Towing the Vehicle From the Rear

Notice Towing the vehicle from the rear could damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the vehicle war ranty. Never have the vehicle towed from the rear.

9-70

Vehicle Care
as possible. If necessary, use nonabrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. To keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible. Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Regularly clean bright metal parts with water or chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim, if nec essary. For aluminum, never use auto or chrome polish, steam, or caustic soap to clean. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.

Rinse the vehicle well, before wash ing and after, to remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean cha mois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Finish Care

Occasional hand waxing or mild pol ishing of the vehicle should be done to remove residue from the paint fin ish. See your dealer for approved cleaning products. Notice Machine compounding or aggres sive polishing on a basecoat/clear coat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and pol ishes that are made for a basecoat/ clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the ve hicle's finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon

Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner. Clean rubber blades using lint-free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild de tergent. Wash the windshield thor oughly when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged. Damage can be caused by extreme dusty conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, snow and ice.

Weatherstrips

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses and Emblems


Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth, and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under "Washing the Vehicle" later in this section.

Apply silicone grease on weather strips to make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. See

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 3 10-5

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to clean the tires.

Vehicle Care
Notice Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on the vehicle may dam age the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, al ways wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle. Notice Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with mag nesium, calcium, or sodium chloride. These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust. Always wash the chrome with soap and water after exposure. Notice To avoid surface damage, do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abra sive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain acid on alumi num or chrome-plated wheels. Use only approved cleaners. Also, never drive a vehicle with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an automatic car was that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning bushes. Dam age could occur and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

9-71

Steering, Suspension, and Chassis Components

Wheels and TrimAluminum or Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mild soap and water to clean the wheels. After rinsing thoroughly with clean water, dry with a soft, clean towel. A wax may then be applied. Keep the wheels clean using a soft, clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft, clean towel. A wax may then be applied.

Visually inspect front and rear sus pension and steering system for dam aged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, bind ing, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visu ally check constant velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and steel fuel door hinge unless the components are plastic. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal bet ter, and not stick or squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt and debris from the vehicle's underbody. Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this. If not removed, rust and corrosion can develop.

9-72

Vehicle Care Interior Care


To prevent dirt particle abrasions, regularly clean the vehicle's interior. Immediately remove any soils. Note that newspapers or dark garments that can transfer color to home fur nishings can also permanently trans fer color to the vehicle's interior. Use a soft bristle brush to remove dust from knobs and crevices on the instrument cluster. Using a mild soap solution, immediately remove hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect repel lant from all interior surfaces or per manent damage may result. Your dealer may have products for cleaning the interior. Use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned to prevent permanent damage. To prevent overspray, apply all cleaners directly to the cleaning cloth. Cleaners should be removed quickly. Never allow cleaners to re main on the surface being cleaned for extended periods of time. Cleaners may contain solvents that can become concentrated in the inte rior. Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning the interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening the doors and windows. To prevent damage, do not clean the interior using the following cleaners or techniques: Never use a razor or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface. Never use a brush with stiff bristles. Never rub any surface aggressively or with excessive pressure. Do not use laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreas ers. For liquid cleaners, use ap proximately 20 drops per 3.78L (1 gal) of water. A concentrated soap solution will leave a residue that creates streaks and attracts dirt. Do not use solutions that contain strong or caustic soap. Do not heavily saturate the uphols tery when cleaning. Do not use solvents or cleaners containing solvents.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop ap plies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corro sion protection. Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion pro tection while maintaining the vehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips and scratches with touch-up materials available from your dealer to avoid corrosion. Larger areas of finish dam age can be corrected in your dealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted vehicle surfaces cuas ing blotchy, ring-shaped discolora tions, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.

Vehicle Care
Interior Glass
To clean: 1. Saturate a clean lint-free colorfast cloth with water or club soda. Mi crofiber cloth is recommended to prevent lint transfer to the fabric or carpet. 2. Remove excess moisture by gen tly wringing until water does not drip from the cleaning cloth. 3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the cen ter. Rotate the cleaning cloth to a clean area frequently to prevent forcing the soil in to the fabric. 4. Continue gently rubbing the soiled area until there is no longer any color transfer from the soil to the cleaning cloth. 5. If the soil is not completely re moved, use a mild soap solution followed by only by club soda or plain water. If the soil is not completely removed, it may be necessary to use a com mercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small hidden area for col orfastness before using a commercial

9-73

To clean, use a terry cloth fabric dampened with water. Wipe droplets left behind with a clean dry cloth. Commercial glass cleaners may be used, if necessary, after cleaning the interior glass with plain water. Notice To prevent scratching, never use abrasive cleaners on automotive glass. Abrasive cleaners or aggres sive cleaning may damage the rear window defogger.

upholster y cleaner or spot lifter. If ring formation occurs, clean the entire fab ric or carpet. Following the cleaning process, a pa per towel can be used to blot excess moisture.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Surfaces

Fabric/Carpet

Use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with water to remove dust and loose dirt. For a more thorough cleaning, use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with a mild soap solution. Notice Soaking or saturating leather, espe cially perforated leather, as well as other interior surfaces, may cause permanent damage. Wipe excess moisture from these surfaces after cleaning and allow them to dry nat urally. Never use heat, steam, spot lifters or spot removers. Do not use cleaners that contain silicone or wax-based products. Cleaners con taining these solvents can perma nently change the appearance and feel of leather or soft trim and are not recommended.

Start by vacuuming the surface using a soft brush attachment. If a rotating brush attachment is being used dur ing vacuuming, only use it on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, gently re move as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques: Gently blot liquids with a paper towel. Continue blotting until no more soil can be removed. For solid soils, remove as much as possible prior to vacuuming.

9-74

Vehicle Care Floor Mats


9 Warning
If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can inter fere with the accelerator pedal and/or brake pedal. Interference with the pedals can cause unin tended acceleration and/or in creased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal. Use the following guidelines for proper floor mat usage. The original equipment floor mats were designed for your vehicle. If the floor mats need replacing, it is recommended that GM certified floor mats be purchased. Non-GM floor mats may not fit properly and may interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal. Always check that the floor mats do not interfere with the pedals. Use the floor mat with the correct side up. Do not turn it over. Do not place anything on top of the driver side floor mat. Use only a single floor mat on the driver side. Do not place one floor mat on top of another. The driver side floor mat is held in place by a button-type retainer.

Do not use cleaners that increase gloss, especially on the instrument panel. Reflected glare can decrease visibility through the windshield under certain conditions. Notice Use of air fresheners may cause permanent damage to plastics and painted surfaces. If an air freshener comes in contact with any plastic or painted surface in the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution. Damage caused by air fresheners would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

9 Warning
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.

Vehicle Care
Removing and Replacing the Floor Mats 1. Pull up on the rear of the floor mat to unlock the retainer and remove. 2. Reinstall by lining up the floor mat retainer opening over the carpet retainer and snap into position. 3. Make sure the floor mat is prop erly secured and verify that it does not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal.

9-75

9-76

Vehicle Care

Service and Maintenance

10-1

Service and Maintenance


General Information
General Information ............... 10-1 Scheduled Maintenance ......... 10-2

General Information
Notice Maintenance intervals, checks, in spections, recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition. Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. As the vehicle owner, you are respon sible for the scheduled maintenance in this section. We recommend hav ing your dealer perform these serv ices. Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition, improves fuel economy, and reduces vehicle emis sions for better air quality. Because of all the different ways peo ple use vehicles, maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need more frequent checks and services. Please read the information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep the vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.

Scheduled Maintenance Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

The maintenance schedule is for ve hicles that: Carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits 3 8-10 . Are driven on reasonable road sur faces within legal driving limits. Use the recommended fuel. See Fuel 3 8-34 .

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........................... 10-5 Maintenance Replacement Parts ................................... 10-6 Maintenance Records ............ 10-8

9 Warning
Performing maintenance work can be dangerous. Some jobs can cause serious injury. Perform maintenance work only if you have the required know-how and the proper tools and equipment. If in doubt, see your dealer to have a qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your Own Service Work 3 9-3 . At your dealer, you can be certain that you will receive the highest level of service available. Your dealer has specially trained service technicians,

Maintenance Records

10-2

Service and Maintenance

uses genuine replacement parts, as well as, up-to-date tools and equip ment to ensure fast and accurate di agnostics. The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to use are listed in

Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil Light Displays

Every Engine Oil Change

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 3 10-5 and Maintenance Replacement Parts 3 10-6 . We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer. Rotation of New Tires To maintain ride, handling, and per formance of the vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service for new tires be performed. Tires should be rotated every 12000km/7,500miles. See Tire Rotation (Long Wheel Base) 3 9-45 .

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil 3 9-7 . When the change engine oil light dis plays, service is required for the vehi cle as soon as possible, within the next 1000km/600miles. If driving un der the best conditions, the engine oil life system might not indicate the need for vehicle service for more than a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and the oil life system must be reset. Your dealer has trained service technicians who will perform this work and reset the system. If the engine oil life sys tem is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within 5000km/3,000miles since the last service. Reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. SeeEngine Oil Life System 3 9-10 .

Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil 3 9-7 and Engine Oil Life System 3 9-10 .An Emission Control

Service.

Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant (2.0L and 2.4L L4 Engines) 3 9-14 . Engine cooling system inspection. Visual inspection of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps and replace ment, if needed. Windshield washer fluid level check. See Washer Fluid 3 9-19 . Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear, cracking, or contamina tion and windshield and wiper blade cleaning, if contaminated. See Exterior Care 3 9-69 . Worn or dam aged wiper blade replacement. See Wiper Blade Replacement 3 9-24 . Tire inflation pressures check. See Tire Pressure 3 9-40 . Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection 3 9-44.

Service and Maintenance


Rotate tires if necessary. See Tire

10-3

Rotation (Long Wheel Base) 3 9-45 . Fluids visual leak check (or every 12months, whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must be re paired and the fluid level checked. Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 3 9-13 . Brake system inspection (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Steering and suspension inspec tion. Visual inspection for dam aged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear. Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders, folding seat hardware, and sunroof (if equipped) lubrica tion. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 3 10-5 . More frequent lubrication may be re quired when the vehicle is exposed to a corrosive environment. Apply ing silicone grease on weather strips with a clean cloth makes them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

Restraint system component check. See Safety System Check3 3-20 . Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks. Exhaust system and nearby heat shields inspection for loose or dam aged components.

Once a Month Tire inflation check. See Tire Pressure 3 9-40. Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection 3 9-44 . Sunroof track and seal inspection, if equipped. See Sunroof 3 2-13 . Once a Year See Starter Switch Check 3 9-22 . See Automatic Transmission Shift

Additional Required Services

Every 12000km/7,500Miles Rotate tires. Tires should be rota ted every 12000km/7,500miles. See Tire Rotation (Long Wheel Base) 3 9-45 . At Each Fuel Stop Engine oil level check. See Engine Oil 3 9-7 . Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant (2.0L and 2.4L L4 Engines)3 9-14 . Windshield washer fluid level check. See Washer Fluid 3 9-19 .

Lock Control Function Check 3 9-23 . See Ignition Transmission Lock Check 3 9-23 . See Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check 3 9-23 . Accelerator pedal check for dam age, high effort, or binding. Replace if needed. Underbody flushing service.

10-4

Service and Maintenance


First Engine Oil Change After Every 60000km/40,000Miles Automatic transmission fluid change (severe service) for vehi cles mainly driven in heavy city traf fic in hot weather, in hilly or moun tainous terrain, when frequently towing a trailer, or used for taxi, po lice, or delivery service. See

Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass Support Gas Strut Service: Visually inspect gas strut, if equipped, for signs of wear, cracks, or other dam age. Check the hold open ability of the gas strut. Contact your dealer if service is required. Once Every Two Years Brake hydraulic fluid replacement. First Engine Oil Change After Every 40000km/25,000Miles Passenger compartment air filter replacement (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first). More fre quent replacement may be needed if you drive in areas with heavy traf fic, areas with poor air quality, or areas with high dust levels. Re placement may also be needed if you notice reduced air flow, win dows fogging up, or odors. Your dealer can help you determine when it is the right time to replace the filter.

Coolant (2.0L and 2.4L L4 Engines) 3 9-14 . An Emission Control Service. Engine drive belts inspection for fraying, excessive cracks, or obvi ous damage (or every 10 years, whichever occurs first). Replace, if needed.

Automatic Transmission Fluid3 9-11 .

First Engine Oil Change After Every 90000km/60,000Miles Spark plug replacement and spark plug wires inspection. An Emission

Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change After Every 120000km/80,000Miles Automatic transmission fluid change (normal service). See

Automatic Transmission Fluid 3 9-11 .

First Engine Oil Change After Every 240000km/150,000Miles Engine cooling system drain, flush, and refill (or every five years, whichever occurs first). See Engine

Service and Maintenance

10-5

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts


Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Engine Oil Fluid/Lubricant The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification. Oils meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil 3 9-7 . 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. See Engine Coolant (2.0L and 2.4L L4 Engines) 3 9-14 . Optikleen Washer Solvent.

Engine Coolant

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 4 Hydraulic Brake Fluid. Windshield Washer Hydraulic Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid. See your dealer. System Automatic Transmission DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube. See your dealer. Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Latch, Pivots, Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GCSpring Anchor, and LB. Release Pawl

10-6
Usage

Service and Maintenance


Fluid/Lubricant Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube. See your dealer. Weatherstrip Lubricant or Dielectric Silicone Grease. See your dealer.

Hood and Door Hinges Weatherstrip Conditioning

Maintenance Replacement Parts


Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer. Part Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 2.0L L4 Engine 2.4L L4 Engine Engine Oil Filter 2.0L L4 Diesel Engine 2.4L L4 Engine Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element Spark Plugs 2.4L L4 Engine Wiper Blades 12625058 41103 96868253 12605566 96800069 PF457G 96628890 GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Service and Maintenance


Part Driver Side 60.0 cm (24.0 in) Passenger Side 40.0 cm (16.0 in) Rear 30.0 cm (12.0 in) GM Part Number 25925618 25925620 96624648 ACDelco Part Number

10-7

10-8

Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts. Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Services Performed

Service and Maintenance


Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Services Performed

10-9

10-10
Date

Service and Maintenance


Odometer Reading Serviced By Services Performed

Service and Maintenance


Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Services Performed

10-11

10-12

Service and Maintenance

Technical Data

11-1

Technical Data
Vehicle Identification Vehicle Data
Identification Plate .................. 11-1 Capacities and Specifications ...................... 11-2 Engine Drive Belt Routing ...... 11-4

Vehicle Identification
Identification Plate
The technical data is determined in accordance with European Commun ity standards. We reserve the right to make modifications. Specifications in the vehicle documents always have priority over those given in this man ual. The Vehicle Identification Num ber (VIN) is on the vehicle identifica tion plate, attached to the top of the front panel support, visible when the hood is open. The vehicle identifica tion plate may also list, in kilograms, the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW), the Gross Train Weight (GTW) and the maximum front and rear axle loads respectively. Observe these limits when using the full load or towing ca pacity of the vehicle. Information on identification plate: Manufacturer Trim level Color code Type approval number Vehicle Identification Number

Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Permissible Gross Train Weight Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is also engraved on the top right-hand side of the bulkhead near the center of the engine firewall. En gine identifier code and engine num ber are stamped on the cylinder block under the engine exhaust manifold (petrol engines) or the intake manifold (diesel engines).

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code helps identify the vehicle's engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See Engine Specifications under Capacities and Specifications 3 11-2 for the vehi cle's engine code.

11-2

Technical Data

Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 3 10-5 for more information. Application Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a Cooling System Engine 2.0LL4 Engine RPO LNP 2.4LL4 Engine RPO LE5 2.4LL4 Engine RPO LE9 Engine Oil with Filter 2.0LL4 Engine RPO LNP 2.4LL4 Engine RPO LE5 2.4LL4 Engine RPO LE9 Fuel Tank Transmission Fluid 5.6L 4.7L 4.7L 65.0L 5.9qt 5.0qt 5.0qt 17.2gal 9.0L 8.5L 8.5L 9.5qt 9.0qt 9.0qt Capacities Metric For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant label located under the hood. See your dealer for more information. English

Technical Data
Application Automatic 6-Speed RPO MH7 Automatic 6-Speed RPO MHC Automatic 6-Speed RPO MHJ Automatic 6-Speed RPO MHK Wheel Nut Torque Capacities Metric 6.7L 6.7L 7.8L 7.8L 140Y

11-3

English 7.1qt 7.1qt 8.2qt 8.2qt 100lbft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications
Engine 2.0LL4 Engine RPO LNP 2.4LL4 Engine RPO LE9 VIN Code Y 1 Transmission Automatic Automatic Spark Plug Gap 1.02mm (0.040in)

11-4

Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.0L Engines 2.4L Engines

3.0L Engine

Customer Information

12-1

Customer Information
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy


This GM vehicle has a number of so phisticated computers that record in formation about the vehicles per formance and how it is driven. For ex ample, the vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control en gine and transmission performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crash, and, if so equipped, to pro vide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may store data to help your dealer technician service the vehicle. Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may also re tain the owners personal preferen ces, such as radio pre-sets, seat po sitions, and temperature settings.

Event Data Recorders


This vehicle has an Event Data Re corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in un derstanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynam ics and safety systems for a short pe riod of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle may re cord such data as: How various systems in the vehicle were operating. Whether or not the driver and pas senger safety belts were buckled/ fastened. How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal. How fast the vehicle was traveling. This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................................ 12-1 Event Data Recorders ............ 12-1 Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ............ 12-2

12-2

Customer Information
through the discovery process; or, as required by law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research pur poses, where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

Notice EDR data is recorded by the vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash loca tion) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the spe cial equipment, can read the informa tion if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. GM will not access this data or share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the les see; in response to an official request of police or similar government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation

Radio Frequency Identification (RFID)


RFID technology is used in some ve hicles for functions such as tire pres sure monitoring and ignition system security, as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for re mote door locking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door openers. RFID tech nology in GM vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information.

13-1

Index

A/C BUTTON .............................. 7-6 Accessories and Modifications.... 9-2 Accessory Power....................... 8-17 Active Head Restraints................ 3-3 Adding Equipment to the AirbagEquipped Vehicle................... 3-30 Add-On Electrical Equipment.... 8-46 Adjustments Lumbar, Front Seats................ 3-5 Airbag Adding Equipment to the Vehicle................................... 3-30 Light On-Off........................... 5-15 Airbag On-Off Light................... 5-15 Airbag On-Off Switch................. 3-27 Airbag Readiness Light............. 5-15 Airbags On-Off Light........................... 5-15 On-Off Switch......................... 3-27 Readiness Light..................... 5-15 Servicing Airbag-Equipped Vehicles................................. 3-29 System Check........................ 3-21 Airbag System........................... 3-21 Check..................................... 3-30 How Does an Airbag Restrain?................................ 3-25

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?................................... 3-25 What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates?...................... 3-26 When Should an Airbag Inflate?................................... 3-24 Where Are the Airbags?........ 3-22 Airbag System Check................ 3-30 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine.......... 9-13 AIR CONDITIONING .................. 7-5 AIR DISTRIBUTION MODE KNOB ...................................... 7-3 AIR VENTS................................. 7-1 Alarm System Anti-theft................................... 2-7 All-Wheel Drive................ 9-25, 9-22 Light....................................... 5-21 All-Wheel-Drive Light (AWD Only)...................................... 5-21 Antilock Brake System (ABS).... 8-25 Warning Light......................... 5-20 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light......................... 5-20 Anti-theft Alarm System........................... 2-7 Locking System........................ 2-7 Anti-Theft Alarm System........... 5-27 Anti-Theft Locking System ......... 2-7

13-2
Appearance Care Exterior................................... 9-69 Interior.................................... 9-72 Ashtrays.................................... 5-10 Automatic Dimming Mirrors..................... 2-10 Door Locks............................... 2-4 Level Control.......................... 8-30 Automatic Dimming Mirror......... 2-10 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror...................................... 2-10 Automatic Door Locks................. 2-4 Automatic Headlamp Leveling System Light.......................... 5-26 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL ............................ 7-10 Automatic Transmission............ 8-22 Fluid....................................... 9-11 Manual Mode......................... 8-24 Shift Lock Control Function Check..................................... 9-23 Automatic Transmission Fluid... 9-11 Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Check. 9-23 Axle, Rear.................................. 9-22 Battery Power Protection............. 6-6 Blade Replacement, Wiper........ 9-24 Brake Assist.............................. 8-28 Brake Fluid................................ 9-20 Brakes....................................... 9-19 Antilock.................................. 8-25 Assist..................................... 8-28 Fluid....................................... 9-20 Parking................................... 8-26 Brake System Warning Light..... 5-19 Braking........................................ 8-3 Break-In, New Vehicle............... 8-13 Bulb Replacement............ 9-27, 9-31 Fog Lamps............................. 9-29 Halogen Bulbs....................... 9-27 Headlamp Aiming................... 9-25 Headlamps............................. 9-27 Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and Parking Lamps.... 9-27 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting......................... 9-27 License Plate Lamps............. 9-30 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps, and Back-up Lamps.................................... 9-30 Buying New Tires...................... 9-46 Buzzers, Warning...................... 5-28

Battery....................................... 9-21 Jump Starting......................... 9-63 Power Protection...................... 6-6

Capacities and Specifications. . . 11-2 Carbon Monoxide Engine Exhaust...................... 8-20 Liftgate..................................... 2-6 Winter Driving.......................... 8-7 Cargo Cover....................................... 4-3 Management System............... 4-3 Cargo Cover................................ 4-3 Cargo Management System........ 4-3 Cautions, Danger, and Warnings 1-1 Center Console Storage ............. 4-2 Chains, Tire............................... 9-48 Change Engine Oil Light........... 5-24 Charging System Light.............. 5-17 Check Engine Light........................... 5-17 Ignition Transmission Lock.... 9-23 Child Restraints Infants and Young Children. . . 3-33 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children............................ 3-38 Older Children........................ 3-31 Securing.............. 3-42, 3-43, 3-44 Systems................................. 3-35 Child Restraint Systems............ 3-35 Cigarette Lighter.......................... 5-9 Circuit Breakers......................... 9-31

13-3
Cleaning Exterior Care.......................... 9-69 Interior Care........................... 9-72 Clock........................................... 5-8 Cluster, Instrument........... 5-11, 5-12 Compact Spare Tire.................. 9-63 Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant.... 9-50 Continuous Damping Control (CDC)..................................... 8-30 Control of a Vehicle..................... 8-3 CONTROL PANEL...................... 7-2 Convenience Net......................... 4-3 Convex Mirrors............................ 2-9 Coolant Engine.................................... 9-14 Engine Temperature Gauge. . 5-14 Engine Temperature Warning Light....................................... 5-23 COOLING ................................... 7-6 Cover Cargo....................................... 4-3 Cruise Control........................... 8-31 Light....................................... 5-27 Cruise Control Light................... 5-27 Cupholders.................................. 4-1 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). . 6-3 DEFROSTING .......................... 7-12 DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING .......................... 7-8 Delayed Locking.......................... 2-4 Descent Control System (DCS). 8-29 Descent Control System Light... 5-21 Diesel Starting Your Engine.............. 8-16 Diesel Particulate Filter............. 8-20 Diesel Particulate Filter Light..... 5-23 Differential, Limited-Slip............ 8-30 Different Size Tires and Wheels 9-46 DISPLAY PANEL........................ 7-9 Doing Your Own Service Work.... 9-3 Dome Lamps .............................. 6-5 Door Ajar Light................................ 5-27 Delayed Locking...................... 2-4 Locks........................................ 2-4 Power Locks............................ 2-4 Door Ajar Light.......................... 5-27 Drive Belt Routing, Engine........ 11-4 Drive Systems All-Wheel Drive............. 9-25, 9-22 Driving Better Fuel Economy............... 8-2 Characteristics and Towing Tips........................................ 8-37 Drunk....................................... 8-2 Highway Hypnosis................... 8-6 Hill and Mountain Roads.......... 8-7 If the Vehicle is Stuck............... 8-9 Loss of Control......................... 8-5 Off-Road Recovery.................. 8-5 Vehicle Load Limits................ 8-10 Wet Roads............................... 8-6 Winter....................................... 8-7 Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips............................ 8-37 Driving for Better Fuel Economy. 8-2 Driving on Wet Roads................. 8-6 Drunk Driving............................... 8-2

Danger, Warnings, and Cautions................................... 1-1 Data Recorders, Event.............. 12-1

ECO Button............................... 8-24 Economy Mode Fuel........................................ 8-24 Electrical Equipment, Add-On... 8-46 Electrical System Engine Compartment Fuse Block...................................... 9-32 Fuses and Circuit Breakers.... 9-31 Instrument Panel Fuse Block. 9-35 Overload................................ 9-31 Electrical System Overload....... 9-31 Electric Parking Brake Light...... 5-20 Electronic Stability Control........ 8-28

13-4
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)..................................... 8-28 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light.............. 5-22 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Light....................... 5-22 Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light........................ 5-22 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter.................... 9-13 Change Engine Oil Light........ 5-24 Check and Service Engine Soon Light.............................. 5-17 Compartment Overview.... 9-4, 9-6 Coolant................................... 9-14 Coolant Temperature Gauge. 5-14 Coolant Temperature Warning Light......................... 5-23 Drive Belt Routing.................. 11-4 Exhaust.................................. 8-20 Gasoline Starting................... 8-15 Overheating........................... 9-17 Overspeed Warning Light...... 5-26 Pressure Light........................ 5-24 Running While Parked........... 8-21 Starting Your Diesel............... 8-16 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter........... 9-13 Engine Compartment Fuse Block...................................... 9-32 Engine Compartment Overview (2.0L RHD)............................... 9-4 Engine Compartment Overview (2.4L RHD)............................... 9-6 Engine Coolant (2.0L and 2.4L L4 Engines)............................ 9-14 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.................................... 5-14 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light......................... 5-23 Engine Drive Belt Routing......... 11-4 Engine Exhaust......................... 8-20 Engine Oil.................................... 9-7 Life System............................ 9-10 Engine Oil Life System.............. 9-10 Engine Oil Pressure Light......... 5-24 Engine Overheating.................. 9-17 Engine Overspeed Warning Light....................................... 5-26 Engines Diesel Fuel............................. 8-34 Petrol Fuel.............................. 8-34 Equipment, Towing.................... 8-43 Event Data Recorders............... 12-1 Exterior Care............................. 9-69 Exterior Lamp Controls ............... 6-1 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder...... 6-2

FAN CONTROL KNOB .............. 7-3 Filling a Portable Fuel Container............................... 8-36 Filling the Tank.......................... 8-35 Filter Diesel Particulate................... 8-20 Engine Air Cleaner................. 9-13 Flashers, Hazard Warning........... 6-3 Flash-to-Pass.............................. 6-2 Flat Tire..................................... 9-48 Changing................................ 9-56 Floor Mats................................. 9-74 Fluid Automatic Transmission......... 9-11 Brakes.................................... 9-20 Power Steering...................... 9-18 Washer................................... 9-19 Fog Lamp Light, Rear................ 5-27 Fog Lamps................................ 9-29 Bulb Replacement................. 9-29 Front......................................... 6-4 Rear......................................... 6-4 Folding Mirrors............................ 2-9 Folding Mirrors (C140)................ 2-9 Folding Seatback......................... 3-7 Front Fog Lamp Light....................................... 5-26 Front Fog Lamp Light................ 5-26

13-5
Front Fog Lamps ........................ 6-4 Front Seats Adjustment............................... 3-3 Heated..................................... 3-7 Front Storage.............................. 4-2 Fuel........................................... 8-34 Diesel Engines....................... 8-34 Economy Light....................... 5-25 Economy, Driving for Better..... 8-2 Filling a Portable Fuel Container............................... 8-36 Filling the Tank....................... 8-35 Gauge.................................... 5-13 Low Fuel Warning Light......... 5-25 Petrol Engines........................ 8-34 Running out of Fuel............... 8-35 Water in Fuel.......................... 8-34 Water in Fuel Warning Light. . 5-25 Fuel Economy Light................... 5-25 Fuel Economy Mode................. 8-24 Fuel for Diesel Engines............. 8-34 Fuel for Petrol Engines.............. 8-34 Fuel Gauge (C140).................... 5-13 Fuses Engine Compartment Fuse Block...................................... 9-32 Fuses and Circuit Breakers.... 9-31 Instrument Panel Fuse Block. 9-35 Fuses and Circuit Breakers....... 9-31

Gasoline Engine, Starting......... 8-15 Gate Ajar Light.......................... 5-28 Gauges Engine Coolant Temperature. 5-14 Fuel........................................ 5-13 Odometer............................... 5-13 Speedometer......................... 5-13 Tachometer............................ 5-13 Trip Odometer........................ 5-13 Warning Lights and Indicators............................... 5-10 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......... 7-9 General Information................... 10-1 Service and Maintenance...... 10-1 Towing................................... 8-37 Vehicle Care............................ 9-2 General Towing Information...... 8-37 Glove Box.................................... 4-1

Halogen Bulbs........................... 9-27 Hazard Warning Flashers............ 6-3 Headlamp Aiming...................... 9-25 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer................................... 6-2 Headlamp Range Adjustment..... 6-2

Headlamps Aiming.................................... 9-25 Bulb Replacement................. 9-27 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)....................................... 6-3 Flash-to-Pass........................... 6-2 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting......................... 9-27 High-Beam On Light.............. 5-26 High/Low Beam Changer......... 6-2 Range Adjustment................... 6-2 Washer..................................... 5-8 Headlamps, Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps................ 9-27 Headlamp Washer ...................... 5-8 Head Restraints........................... 3-2 Active....................................... 3-3 Healamps Automatic Headlamp Leveling System Light.......................... 5-26 Heated Front Seats..................... 3-7 Heated Mirrors........................... 2-10 HEATING ................................... 7-7 High-Beam On Light.................. 5-26 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting.................................. 9-27 Highway Hypnosis....................... 8-6 Hill and Mountain Roads............. 8-7 Hood............................................ 9-3

13-6
Horn............................................. 5-6 How Does an Airbag Restrain?. 3-25 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly.................................. 3-12 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly (RHD)...................... 3-12 Instrument Panel Illumination Control .................................... 6-5 Instrument Panel Overview (C140 (RHD))........................... 5-3 Instrument Panel Storage........... 4-1 Interior Care.............................. 9-72 Introduction.................................. 1-1 Lap-Shoulder Belt..................... 3-16 LATCH, Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children............... 3-38 LATCH System Replacing Parts after a Crash 3-42 Level Control Automatic............................... 8-30 License Plate Lamp................... 9-30 Liftgate......................................... 2-6 Carbon Monoxide..................... 2-6 Light Diesel Particulate Filter.......... 5-23 Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Off.............................. 5-22 Lighter, Cigarette......................... 5-9 Lighting Illumination Control.................. 6-5 Lights Airbag On-Off......................... 5-15 Airbag Readiness.................. 5-15 All-Wheel Drive...................... 5-21 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning.................................. 5-20 Automatic Headlamp Leveling System................................... 5-26 Brake System Warning.......... 5-19 Change Engine Oil................. 5-24 Charging System................... 5-17 Cruise Control........................ 5-27

Identification Plate..................... 11-1 If a Tire Goes Flat...................... 9-48 If the Vehicle Is Stuck.................. 8-9 Ignition Positions....................... 8-14 Ignition Transmission Lock Check..................................... 9-23 Immobilizer Light....................................... 5-25 Immobilizer Light....................... 5-25 Immobilizer Operation................. 2-8 Infants and Young Children....... 3-33 Infants and Young Children, Restraints............................... 3-33 Instrument Cluster............ 5-11, 5-12 Instrument Cluster (C140 Diesel KM)........................................ 5-11 Instrument Cluster (C140 Gen RHD GAS KM)....................... 5-12 Instrument Panel Storage Area............................ 4-1 Instrument Panel Fuse Block.... 9-35

Jump Starting............................ 9-63

Keyless Entry Remote (RKE) System............. 2-2 Keys............................................ 2-1

Lamps Daytime Running (DRL)........... 6-3 Dome....................................... 6-5 Exterior Controls...................... 6-1 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder. . 6-2 Front Fog................................. 6-4 Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and Parking Lamps.... 9-27 License Plate......................... 9-30 Malfunction Indicator.............. 5-17 Reading.................................... 6-6 Rear Fog.................................. 6-4 Lap Belt..................................... 3-19

13-7
Descent Control System........ 5-21 Door Ajar................................ 5-27 Electric Parking Brake............ 5-20 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning.................................. 5-23 Engine Oil Pressure............... 5-24 Engine Overspeed Warning... 5-26 Flash-to-Pass........................... 6-2 Fog Lamp, Rear..................... 5-27 Front Fog Lamp..................... 5-26 Fuel Economy........................ 5-25 Gate Ajar................................ 5-28 High-Beam On....................... 5-26 High/Low Beam Changer......... 6-2 Immobilizer............................. 5-25 Low Engine Oil Level............. 5-24 Low Fuel Warning.................. 5-25 Safety Belt Reminders........... 5-14 Service Vehicle Soon............. 5-19 Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS) Warning...... 5-22 Trailer Indicator...................... 5-27 Ultrasonic Parking Sensor..... 5-22 Wait to Start........................... 5-23 Water in Fuel Warning........... 5-25 Limited-Slip Differential............. 8-30 Locking Systems, Anti-theft......... 2-7 Lockout Protection....................... 2-5 Locks Automatic Door........................ 2-4 Delayed Locking...................... 2-4 Door......................................... 2-4 Lockout Protection................... 2-5 Power Door.............................. 2-4 Safety....................................... 2-5 Loss of Control............................ 8-5 Low Engine Oil Level Light........ 5-24 Low Engine Oil Level Light (Diesel Only).......................... 5-24 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System)..... 3-38 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) (All Other Markets)....................... 3-38 Low Fuel Warning Light............. 5-25 Lumbar Adjustment..................... 3-5 Front Seats.............................. 3-5 Malfunction Indicator Lamp....... 5-17 MANUAL CONTROL ................ 7-11 Manual Mode............................. 8-24 Manual Rearview Mirror............ 2-10 Mirrors Automatic Dimming................ 2-10 Automatic Dimming Rearview 2-10 Convex..................................... 2-9 Folding..................................... 2-9 Heated................................... 2-10 Manual Rearview................... 2-10 Power....................................... 2-9 Monitor System, Tire Pressure.. 9-43

Net, Convenience........................ 4-3 New Vehicle Break-In................ 8-13

Maintenance Records.................................. 10-8 Maintenance Records............... 10-8 Maintenance Replacement Parts....................................... 10-6 Maintenance Schedule Recommended Fluids and Lubricants.............................. 10-5 Scheduled Maintenance........ 10-2

Odometer.................................. 5-13 Trip......................................... 5-13 Off-Road Recovery.................................. 8-5 Off-Road Recovery...................... 8-5 Oil Change Engine Oil Light........ 5-24 Engine...................................... 9-7 Engine Oil Life System........... 9-10 Low Engine Oil Level Light.... 5-24 Pressure Light........................ 5-24

13-8
Older Children........................... 3-31 Older Children, Restraints......... 3-31 OPERATING TIPS FOR VENTILATION SYSTEM ....... 7-13 Outlets Power....................................... 5-9 OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY ............................... 7-12 Overheating, Engine................. 9-17 Overspeed Warning Light......... 5-26 Protection, Battery................... 6-6 Retained Accessory (RAP).... 8-17 Seat Adjustment....................... 3-4 Steering Fluid......................... 9-18 Windows................................ 2-11 Power Door Locks....................... 2-4 Power Seat Adjustment............... 3-4 Power Steering Fluid................. 9-18 Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts.. 3-18 Privacy Radio Frequency Identification (RFID)............... 12-2 Radio Frequency Identification (RFID)............... 12-2 Radio Frequency Identification (RFID).................................... 12-2 Reading Lamps .......................... 6-6 Rear Axle................................... 9-22 Rear Fog Lamp Light................. 5-27 Rear Fog Lamps ......................... 6-4 Rear Seats.................................. 3-8 Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming................ 2-10 Rearview Mirrors....................... 2-10 Rear Window Washer/Wiper....... 5-7 Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...... 5-7 RECIRCULATION MODE BUTTON ................................. 7-4 Reclining Seatbacks.................... 3-5 Recommended Cold Tire Inflation.................................. 9-42 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants.............................. 10-5 Records Maintenance.......................... 10-8 Recreational Vehicle Towing..... 9-66 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System..................................... 2-2 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation.................... 2-2 Replacement Bulbs................... 9-31 Replacement Parts Airbags................................... 3-30 Maintenance.......................... 10-6 Replacing Airbag System.......... 3-30 Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash ......................... 3-30 Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash.......................... 3-42 Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash ................ 3-20 Restraints Where to Put.......................... 3-37 Retained Accessory Power (RAP)..................................... 8-17 Ride Control Systems................ 8-28

Park Shifting into............................ 8-18 Shifting out of......................... 8-19 Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check................. 9-23 Parking Assist, Ultrasonic................... 8-33 Brake...................................... 8-26 Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check................. 9-23 Over Things That Burn........... 8-20 Ultrasonic Sensor Light.......... 5-22 Parking Brake............................ 8-26 Parking over Things That Burn. 8-20 Power Door Locks............................... 2-4 Mirrors...................................... 2-9 Outlets...................................... 5-9

13-9
Electronic Stability (ESC)....... 8-28 Enhanced Traction System (ETS)...................................... 8-30 Roads Driving, Wet............................. 8-6 Roof Sunroof.................................. 2-13 Roof Rack System....................... 4-4 Rotation, Tires........................... 9-45 Routing, Engine Drive Belt........ 11-4 Running Out of Fuel.................. 8-35 Running the Vehicle While Parked.................................... 8-21 Safety Belt Care ....................... 3-20 Safety Belt Reminders............... 5-14 Safety Belts............................... 3-10 Care....................................... 3-20 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly.................................. 3-12 Lap Belt.................................. 3-19 Lap-Shoulder Belt.................. 3-16 Reminders.............................. 5-14 Replacing after a Crash......... 3-20 Use During Pregnancy........... 3-18 Safety Belts (All except Aus, NZ)......................................... 3-10 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy.............................. 3-18 Safety Locks................................ 2-5 Safety System Check................ 3-20 Scheduled Maintenance............ 10-2 Sealant Kit, Tire......................... 9-50 Seat Adjustment.......................... 3-3 Seats Adjustment, Front..................... 3-3 Folding Seatback..................... 3-7 Head Restraints....................... 3-2 Heated Front............................ 3-7 Lumbar Adjustment, Front....... 3-5 Power Adjustment, Front......... 3-4 Rear......................................... 3-8 Reclining Seatbacks................ 3-5 Securing Child Restraints.......... ............................. 3-42, 3-43, 3-44 Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat with Airbag Off Switch). . 3-44 Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat without Airbag Off Switch)................................... 3-43 Securing Child Restraints (Rear Seat)...................................... 3-42 Security Vehicle..................................... 2-7 Service Maintenance Records............ 10-8 Accessories and Modifications. 9-2 Doing Your Own Work............. 9-3 Engine Soon Light................. 5-17 Maintenance, General Information............................. 10-1 Vehicle Soon Light................. 5-19 Service Vehicle Soon Light....... 5-19 Servicing the Airbag.................. 3-29 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle................................... 3-29 Shifting Into Park................................. 8-18 Out of Park............................. 8-19 Shifting Into Park ...................... 8-18 Shifting out of Park.................... 8-19 Shift Lock Control Function Check, Automatic Transmission.......................... 9-23 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change. 6-3 Spare Tire Compact................................. 9-63 Specifications and Capacities. . . 11-2 Speedometer............................. 5-13 Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS) Warning Light............ 5-22 Starter Switch Check................. 9-22 Starting the Diesel Engine......... 8-16 Starting the Gasoline Engine.... 8-15 Starting Your Diesel Engine...... 8-16 Steering....................................... 8-4 Fluid, Power........................... 9-18

13-10
Wheel Adjustment.................... 5-5 Wheel Controls........................ 5-5 Steering Wheel Adjustment (C140)...................................... 5-5 Steering Wheel Controls ............ 5-5 Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps Bulb Replacement................. 9-30 Storage Areas Cargo Cover............................. 4-3 Cargo Management System.... 4-3 Center Console........................ 4-2 Convenience Net..................... 4-3 Front......................................... 4-2 Glove Box................................ 4-1 Instrument Panel...................... 4-1 Roof Rack System................... 4-4 Sunglasses.............................. 4-2 Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit...................... 9-56 Stuck Vehicle............................... 8-9 Sunglasses Storage.................... 4-2 Sunglass Storage........................ 4-2 Sunroof...................................... 2-13 Sun Visors................................. 2-12 Switches Airbag On-Off......................... 3-27 Symbols....................................... 1-2 System Roof Rack................................ 4-4 Different Size......................... 9-46 If a Tire Goes Flat.................. 9-48 Inflation Monitor System........ 9-44 Inspection............................... 9-44 Pressure Monitor System....... 9-43 Rotation.................................. 9-45 Sealant and Compressor Kit. . 9-50 Sealant and Compressor Kit, Storing.................................... 9-56 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance.................................. 9-47 Wheel Replacement............... 9-47 When It Is Time for New Tires....................................... 9-45 Winter..................................... 9-39 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit........................................... 9-50 Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires....................................... 8-43 Towing Driving Characteristics........... 8-37 Equipment.............................. 8-43 General Information............... 8-37 Recreational Vehicle.............. 9-66 Trailer..................................... 8-40 Trailer Sway Control (TSC).... 8-46 Vehicle................................... 9-66 Towing Equipment..................... 8-43 Towing the Vehicle.................... 9-66

Tachometer............................... 5-13 Taillamps Bulb Replacement................. 9-30 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps.................................... 9-30 TEMPERATURE CONTROL KNOB ...................................... 7-3 TEMPERATURE UNIT CHANGE ............................... 7-12 Theft-Deterrent Systems............. 2-8 Time............................................ 5-8 Tire Chains................................ 9-48 Tire Changing............................ 9-56 Tire Inspection........................... 9-44 Tire Pressure............................. 9-40 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation............................... 9-44 Tire Pressure Monitor System... 9-43 Tire Rotation (Long Wheel Base)...................................... 9-45 Tires.......................................... 9-39 Buying New Tires................... 9-46 Chains.................................... 9-48 Changing................................ 9-56 Compact Spare...................... 9-63

13-11
Traction Limited-Slip Differential.......... 8-30 Trailer Sway Control (TSC)............... 8-46 Trailer Indicator Light................. 5-27 Trailer Sway Control (TSC)....... 8-46 Trailer Towing............................ 8-40 Transmission Automatic............................... 8-22 Fluid, Automatic..................... 9-11 Trip Odometer........................... 5-13 Turn and Lane-Change Signals . 6-3 Turn Signal Bulb Replacement................. 9-30 Vehicle Care Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit...................... 9-56 Tire Pressure......................... 9-40 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy................................... 12-1 Vehicle Identification Plate....................................... 11-1 Vehicle Load Limits................... 8-10 VENTILATION............................. 7-7 Visors........................................ 2-12 Weight of the Trailer Tongue..... 8-42 What Makes an Airbag Inflate?. 3-25 What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates?...................... 3-26 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance.................................. 9-47 Wheel Replacement.................. 9-47 Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance... 9-47 Different Size......................... 9-46 Replacement.......................... 9-47 When It Is Time for New Tires... 9-45 When Should an Airbag Inflate? ............................................... 3-24 Where Are the Airbags? ........... 3-22 Where to Put the Restraint ....... 3-37 Windows.................................... 2-11 Power..................................... 2-11 Windshield Wiper/Washer.......................... 5-6 Windshield Wiper/Washer .......... 5-6 Winter Driving...................................... 8-7 Winter Driving.............................. 8-7 Winter Tires............................... 9-39 Wiper Blade Replacement......... 9-24 Wipers Rear Washer............................ 5-7

Ultrasonic Parking Assist........... 8-33 Ultrasonic Parking Assist (UD7 For Vehicles with 3 Sensors). 8-33 Ultrasonic Parking Sensor Light ............................................... 5-22 Using This Manual....................... 1-1

Vehicle Control..................................... 8-3 Load Limits............................. 8-10 Security.................................... 2-7 Service Soon Light................. 5-19 Towing................................... 9-66

Wait to Start Light...................... 5-23 Wait-to-Start Light (Diesel Only) 5-23 Warning Brake System Light................ 5-19 Warning Buzzers....................... 5-28 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators............................... 5-10 Warnings..................................... 1-1 Cautions and Danger............... 1-1 Hazard Flashers....................... 6-3 Washer Fluid............................. 9-19 Washer, Headlamps.................... 5-8 Water in Fuel............................. 8-34 Water in Fuel Warning Light...... 5-25 Water in Fuel Warning Light (Diesel Only).......................... 5-25 Weight of the Trailer.................. 8-41

13-12